Laboratory Manual

Student Edition A Glencoe Program

Hands-On Learning: Teacher Resources: Laboratory Manual, SE/TE Lesson Plans Forensics Laboratory Manual, SE/TE Block Scheduling Lesson Plans CBL Laboratory Manual, SE/TE Spanish Resources Small-Scale Laboratory Manual, SE/TE Section Focus Transparencies and Masters ChemLab and MiniLab Worksheets Math Skills Transparencies and Masters Teaching Transparencies and Masters Review/Reinforcement: Solutions Manual Study Guide for Content Mastery, SE/TE Solving Problems: A Chemistry Handbook Technology: Reviewing Chemistry Chemistry Interactive CD-ROM Guided Reading Audio Program Vocabulary PuzzleMaker Software, Windows/Macintosh Applications and Enrichment: Glencoe Science Web site: Challenge Problems science.glencoe.com Supplemental Problems

Assessment: Chapter Assessment MindJogger Videoquizzes (VHS) TestCheck Software, Windows/Macintosh

Copyright © by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Permission is granted to reproduce the material contained herein on the condition that such material be reproduced only for classroom use; be provided to students, teachers, and families without charge; and be used solely in conjunction with the Chemistry: Matter and Change program. Any other reproduction, for use or sale, is prohibited without prior written permission of the publisher.

Send all inquiries to: Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 8787 Orion Place Columbus, OH 43240-4027

ISBN 0-07-824524-9 Printed in the United States of America. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 045 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 LABORATORY MANUAL Contents

How to Use This Laboratory Manual ...... vii Writing a Laboratory Report ...... viii Laboratory Equipment ...... x Safety in the Laboratory ...... xiii Safety Symbols ...... xiv

Laboratory Activities

CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Chemistry 1.1 Laboratory Techniques and Lab Safety ...... 1 1.2 Effective Use of a Bunsen Burner ...... 5

CHAPTER 2 Data Analysis 2.1 Density ...... 9 2.2 Making a Graph ...... 13

CHAPTER 3 Matter—Properties and Changes 3.1 The Density of Wood ...... 17 3.2 Properties of Water ...... 21

CHAPTER 4 The Structure of the Atom 4.1 Simulation of Rutherford’s Gold Foil Experiment ...... 25 4.2 Half-life of Barium-137m ...... 29

CHAPTER 5 Electrons in Atoms 5.1 The Photoelectric Effect ...... 33 5.2 Electron Charge to Mass Ratio ...... 37

CHAPTER 6 The Periodic Table and Periodic Law

Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter and Change iii iv CHAPTER 14 CHAPTER 13 CHAPTER 12 CHAPTER 11 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 9 CHAPTER 8 CHAPTER 7 14.2 14.1 13.2 13.1 12.2 12.1 11.2 11.1 10.2 10.1 9.2 9.1 8.2 8.1 7.2 7.1 hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange ol’ a ...... 109 . . Boyle’s Law 105 Charles’s Law . 101 . Boiling Points 97 . Freezing Bacteria 93 . Determining ReactionRatios 89 . . Observing aLimitingReactant 85 . Mole Ratios 81 . . Estimating theSizeofaMole 77 . . Double-Replacement Reactions 73 . . Single-Replacement Reactions 69 . Covalent Compounds 65 . Covalent BondinginMedicines 61 . Formation ofaSalt 57 . Properties ofIonicCompounds 53 . The PeriodicPuzzle 49 . Is therepotassiumincoffee? The Elements Covalent Bonding Ionic Compounds The Mole Gases States ofMatter Stoichiometry Chemical Reactions LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual CHAPTER 22 CHAPTER 21 CHAPTER 20 CHAPTER 19 CHAPTER 18 CHAPTER 17 CHAPTER 16 CHAPTER 15 22.2 22.1 21.2 21.1 20.2 20.1 19.2 19.1 18.2 18.1 17.2 17.1 16.2 16.1 15.2 15.1 et fSlto n ecin 121 . Heats ofSolutionandReaction 117 . Freezing PointDepression 113 . Making aSolubilityCurve h ieigo ri ihEhn ...... 173 . The RipeningofFruitwithEthene 169 . Isomerism 165 . Electroplating 161 . Electrolysis of Water 157 . Determining OxidationNumbers 153 . . Electron-Losing Tendencies ofMetals 149 Determining thePercentof Acetic Acid in . Vinegar 145 . andNeutralization Bases, Acids, 141 . . Equilibrium 137 . . Reversible Reactions 133 . Surface Area andReactionRate 129 . The RateofaReaction 125 . Heat ofCombustion ofCandle Wax Acids andBases Hydrocarbons Electrochemistry Redox Reactions Chemical Equilibrium Reaction Rates Energy andChemicalChange Solutions LABORATORY MANUAL v vi CHAPTER 26 CHAPTER 25 CHAPTER 24 CHAPTER 23 26.2 26.1 25.2 25.1 24.2 24.1 23.2 23.1 hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange rwho la saFnto fNtoe ocnrto ....205 . Growth of Algae asaFunctionofNitrogenConcentration 201 . Organisms That BreakDown Oil 197 . . Modeling Isotopes 193 . Radioisotope Dating 189 . Saturated andUnsaturatedFats 185 . Denaturation 181 . Polymerization Reactions 177 . The CharacterizationofCarbohydrates The ChemistryofLife Chemistry intheEnvironment Nuclear Chemistry Substituted Hydrocarbons and Their Reactions LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. same asthoseusedbyprofessionalchemistsandallotherscientists. conclusions basedonthosedataandyourknowledge ofchemistry. These processesarethe anddraw analyzethosedata, measureandrecorddataobservations, test hypotheses, ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual ¥ Organization of Activities learn moreaboutmatter. The activities inthe about matteranditschanges.Laboratoryactivities aretheprimarymeansthatchemistsuseto chemistryisnotjustinformation.Italsoaprocessforfinding outmore about matter. But, youwilllearnagreatdealoftheinformationthathasbeengatheredbyscientists chemistry, andchanges.Inyourclassroomwork in itsproperties, Chemistry isthescienceofmatter, How toUse This Laboratory Manual ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ background discussionabouttheproblemyouwillstudyinactivity. complete theactivity successfully. sol aehpee. Anopportunitytoanalyzepossibleerrorsintheactivity isalsogiven. “should have happened.” notwhat You areasked toformascientific conclusionbasedonwhatyouactuallyobserved, tions toaidyouininterpretingdataandobservations inordertoreachanexperimental result. calculations necessaryforyoutoanalyzeyourdataand reachconclusions.Itprovides ques- research aquestionrelated totheactivity. the activity tootherreal-lifesituations. You maybeasked tomake additionalconclusionsor CAUTION sometimes offer hints tohelpyoubesuccessfulinthelaboratory. Someactivities have activity. laboratory data. Always recorddataandobservations inanorganized way asyoudothe aoaoy eoebgnigayatvt,refertopagexiv toseewhatthesesymbolsmean. laboratory. Before beginning any activity, Real-World Chemistry Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Hypothesis Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Materials Objectives Problem Introduction activity. investigation. Recheckthislistwhenyouhave finished theactivity. The questionsinthissectioncheckyourknowledge ofimportantconceptsneededto The problemtobestudiedinthisactivity isclearlystated. The materialslistshows theapparatusyouneedtohave onhandfortheactivity. The numberedstepsoftheproceduretellyouhow tocarryouttheactivity and The objectives arestatementsofwhatyoushouldaccomplishbydoingthe statements intheproceduretoalertyouhazardoussubstancesortechniques. This sectionprovides anopportunityforyoutowritedown ahypothesisforthis olwn h il n ubro ahatvt,anintroductionprovides a Following thetitleandnumberofeachactivity, Safety symbolsandstatementswarn youofpotentialhazardsinthe The questionsinthissectionaskyoutoapplywhat have learnedin The Analyze and Concludesectionshows youhow toperform the This sectionpresentsasuggestedtableorformforcollectingyour Laboratory Manual require thatyouformand LABORATORY MANUAL vii viii 2. 1. logicalmanner. Tables andgraphsareoftenusedforthispurpose. organized, all yourdatainalaboratoryreport. An analysisofdataiseasierifallarerecordedinan youshouldrecord formulate generalizationsaboutthedata. When youwork inthelaboratory, and collectandanalyze data, they make observations, When scientistsperformexperiments, Writing aLaboratory Report recorded in day. Then theaverage heightoftheplantsineachcontainer each daywas calculatedand water every dayfor2weeks. The scientistmeasuredtheheightsof growing plantsevery three containerswereplacedinawell-litroom.Eachcontainerreceived thesameamountof andContainerCdidnotreceive any fertilizer. All Container Bwas treatedwithFertilizerB, bean plantwas plantedineachofthreecontainers.Container A was treatedwithFertilizer A, experiment. Three containerswerefilled withequalamountsofpottingsoilandonehealthy thescientistsetupan fertilizers insupplyingneededmineralstoplants. To testthisidea, plantscannotgrow properly. A scientistwanted totesttheeffectiveness ofdifferent not met, andliving space.Iftheseneedsare sunlight, carbondioxide, minerals, All plantsneedwater, Read thefollowing description ofanexperiment. Then answerthequestions. experiment following yourdirections. conclusions. to theproblemstatement. Conclusions: Results: Procedure: Materials: Hypothesis: Title: conclusions shouldbeananalysisofyourcollecteddata. experiment. What materialswereneededforthisexperiment? What was thepurposeofthisexperiment? hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange The titleshouldclearlydescribethetopicofreport. nld nyu eotaldt,tbe,gah,andsketches usedtoarrive atyour graphs, tables, Include inyourreportalldata, Data Table1. List alllaboratoryequipmentandothermaterialsneededtoperformthe Describe eachstepoftheproceduresothatsomeoneelsecouldperform Write astatementtoexpress yourexpectations oftheresultsandasananswer Record yourconclusionsinaparagraphattheendofreport. Your The scientistthenplottedthedataonagraph. LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. otie 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Container days onthehorizontalaxis.Useadifferent coloredpencilforthegraphof eachcontainer. Plot thedatain conclusion forthisexperiment. Data Table1 Write astep-by-stepprocedureforthisexperiment. 05 86 58 59 1 120 110 90 85 80 75 60 58 50 20 A 63 15 87 58 0 108 100 80 75 70 58 50 41 30 16 101220C B 243025425058 60 hw h aacletdi hseprmn.Bsdo hsdt,statea shows thedatacollected inthisexperiment. Basedonthisdata, Data Table1 Data Table 1:Average HeightofGrowing Plants(inmm) on agraph.Show average heightonthe vertical axisandthe Day LABORATORY MANUAL ix x Laboratory Equipment hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Laboratory Equipment, continued LABORATORY MANUAL xi xii Laboratory Equipment, hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange continued LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. 12. 11. 10. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual rules tohelpguideyouinprotectingyourselfandothersfrominjuryalaboratory. printed inthismanualandthosegiven toyoubyyourteacher. The following aresomesafety but youcanhelpprevent thembycloselyfollowing theinstructions caused bycarelessness, for yourown personalsafetyandthatofpeopleworking nearyou. Accidents areusually The chemistrylaboratoryisaplacetoexperiment andlearn. You mustassumeresponsibility Safety intheLaboratory 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. ue,ppr orbeakers toobtain yourchemicals. paper, tubes, unless specifically instructedtodoso.Usetest and whenyouputthebottleback. whenthecontainerisinyourhand, container, beforeyoupickupthe the labelsthreetimes: Do Do all bottles Handle chemicalscarefully. damaged equipmentimmediatelytoyourteacher. or incorrectprocedure, injury, Report any accident, for you. Know how tousethesafetyequipmentprovided andfirst-aid kit. fire blanket, eyewash, shower, safety Know thelocationoffire extinguisher, feet orsandalsarenotpermittedinthelab. Wear shoesthat cover thefeetatalltimes.Bare chemical apparatus. either theclothingorjewelry couldcatchon clothing. The looseclothingmaycatchfire and draping Avoid wearingdanglingjewelry orloose, possibility ofitcatchingfire. Long hairshouldbetiedbacktoreducethe are difficult toremove inanemergency. if gogglesareworn. Lensescanabsorbvapors and even Contact lensesshouldnotbeworn inthelab, irritations orcanbeabsorbedthroughtheskin. be worn whenever you usechemicalsthatcause worn whenever youwork inthelab. Gloves should Safety gogglesandalaboratoryapronmustbe teacher forhelp. askyour If youareindoubtaboutany procedures, Study yourlabactivity teacher’s permission. work. Donotperformactivities withoutyour The chemistrylaboratoryisaplaceforserious oratory. Work onlywhenyourteacherispresent. not not return unusedchemicalstoreagent bottles. take reagentbottlestoyourwork area before removing thecontents. Never before Check thelabelsof work aloneinthelab- you cometothelab. Read 21. 20. 19. 18. 17. 16. 15. 24. 23. 22. 14. 13. solutions. Know thecorrect procedureforpreparingacid teacher. products ofreactionsonlyasdirectedbyyour and unusedchemicals, Dispose ofbroken glass, looks thesameascoolglass. handling hotapparatusorglassware. Hotglass Use cautionandtheproperequipmentwhen of atesttube. person oryourself.Never lookdown themouth not topointthemouthoftubeatanother becareful When heatingasubstanceintesttube, such materialsarepresent. direction ofyourteacher. Usethefumehoodwhen Handle toxicandcombustible gasesonlyunderthe flames. (Alcoholandacetonearecombustible.) Keep combustible materialsaway fromopen the natureofspill. ties ofwater. Immediatelyinformyourteacherof flushtheareaimmediatelywithlarge quanti- skin, If chemicalscomeintocontactwithyoureyes or prohibited inthelaboratory. andsmokingare chewing gum, drinking, Eating, any chemicalsintoapipettewithyourmouth. chemicals directlyonthepanofbalance. Keep thebalance areaclean.Never weigh Never small amountofthechemicalintoabeaker. Do than todisposeofexcess. Take onlysmallamounts.Itiseasiertogetmore with soapandwater beforeyouleave thelab. the gasandwater areturnedoff. Wash yourhands your equipment.Clean work area.Make sure cleanandputaway After completinganactivity, pipettes withalaboratoryburner. Do not not taste any chemicalsubstance. LABORATORY MANUAL insert droppersintoreagentbottles.Poura etgautdclnes uets or burettes, heat graduatedcylinders, Always add theacidslowlytowater Never draw xiii . SAFETY SYMBOLS xiv below. Besureyourstudentsunderstandeachsymbolbeforethey begin anactivity thatdisplaysasymbol. laboratory hazards. These symbols areprovided inthestudenttext insidethefrontcover andareexplained The TEMPERATURE BIOLOGICAL hmsr:MatterandChange Chemistry: ELECTRICAL CHEMICAL DISPOSAL EXTREME IRRITANT activities. or observingscience anyone performing worn atalltimesby protection shouldbe Proper eye Eye Safety hmsr:Mte n hneLaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange OBJECT FLAME SHARP TOXIC FUME OPEN from fumes respiratory tract Possible dangerto too coldorhot burn skinbybeing Objects thatcan followed. cedures needtobe Special disposalpro- swallowed touched, inhaled,or poisonous if Substance maybe the respiratorytract mucus membranesof irritate theskinor Substances thatcan other materials destroy tissueand react withand Chemicals thatcan burn electrical shockor Possible dangerfrom slice skin easily punctureor glassware thatcan Use oftoolsor harmful tohumans that mightbe biological materials Organisms orother clothing, orhair chemicals, loose ignite flammable Open flamemay HAZARD program usessafetysymbolstoalertyouandyourstudentspossible clothing. stain orburn substances could appears when This symbol Protection Clothing parts poinsettia plant compounds, iodine, mercury, manymetal permanganate glass, potassium steel wool,fiber pollen, mothballs, balls heated sulfur, moth nail polishremover, ammonia, acetone, nitrogen plates, dryice,liquid boiling liquids,hot living organisms certain chemicals, clothing permanganate, hair, potassium alcohol, kerosene, hydroxide ammonia, sodium acid; basessuchas acid, hydrochloric acids suchassulfuric hydrogen peroxide; bleaches suchas wires circuits, exposed liquid spills,short improper grounding, probes, brokenglass tools, dissecting scalpels, pointed razor blades,pins, materials tissues, plant blood, unpreserved bacteria, fungi, EXAMPLES be ensured. and studentsmust safety ofanimals appears when This symbol Animal Safety directly. Wear amask. Never smellfumes good ventilation. Make surethereis use ofthetool. follow guidelinesfor sense behaviorand Practice common- handling. protection when Use proper Wear maskorgloves. with thesematerials. Avoid skincontact the sinkortrashcan. these materialsin Do notdisposeof equipment. locations offiresafety chemicals. Beawareof when usingflammable Avoid openflames wearing looseclothing. Tie backhair. Avoid instructions. Follow yourteacher’s apron. gloves, andan Wear goggles, these materials. care whenhandling gloves. Practiceextra Wear dustmaskand and apparatus. condition ofwires with teacher. Check Double-check setup PRECAUTION LABORATORY MANUAL immediately. notify yourteacher Leave foulareaand for firstaid. Go toyourteacher teacher. directed byyour Dispose ofwastesas for firstaid. Go toyourteacher thoroughly afteruse. Always washhands for firstaid. Go toyourteacher for firstaid. Go toyourteacher hands thoroughly. with material.Wash you suspectcontact Notify yourteacherif applicable. safety equipmentif immediately. Usefire Notify yourteacher notify yourteacher. with waterand the affected area Immediately flush immediately. Notify yourteacher electrical problems. Do notattempttofix materials areused. radioactive appears when This symbol Radioactivity REMEDY

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. C and LabSafety Laboratory Techniques aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 1 Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions mixture beseparated? be measured?Howcana can thevolumeofaliquid object bemeasured?How How canthemassofan Problem Name of chemicals.You willalsoreviewspecificsafetyrules. solid materials,measurethevolumeofaliquid,andseparatemixtures apply laboratorysafetyrules.You willdeterminethemassofdifferent teacher beforeproceeding. lab activity. Ifyouareunsureofanyprocedure,always askyour teacher willprovidetheseaddedinstructionsbeforeyouperformany or specialprocedurestofollowwhenperforminganexperiment.Your this labmanual.However, thereoftenwillbemorespecificsafetyrules equipment. Generalsafetyrulesaresummarizedatthebeginningof adopt correctproceduresforusingglasswareandotherpiecesof clean workenvironmentmustbefollowedatalltimes.You mustalso classroom. Certainrulesofconductpertainingtosafetyandkeepinga clarify, anddevelopprinciplesofchemistry. and LabSafety Laboratory Techniques What shouldyoudoif spillachemical? excess chemicals? What isthesafetyruleconcerning thehandlingof in thelaboratory? What isthesafetyruleconcerning working alone LAB In thisactivity, youwillpracticesomelaboratorytechniques and Behavior inthelaboratoryismorestructuredthan hemistry hasbeendevelopedlargelythroughexperimentation. Chemistry coursesuselaboratoryexperiencestodemonstrate, 1.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Nevereatortasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives filtration. of amixturethrough Separate water. Measure substances. Measure a volumeof the massofsolid components 4. experiment. Recordyourhypothesisonpage3. the different chemicalsandlabequipmentinthis what safetyprecautionswill beneededtohandle Read theentirelaboratory activity. Hypothesize aeClass Date ring stand balance 50-mL beakers(2) 250-mL beakers(2) 100-mL graduated distilled water sand table salt Materials cylinder watch glass water bottle weighing paper filter paper stirring rod scoops (2) funnel ring Section 1.4 Use with 1 2 Procedure Name 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB cone inthefunnel. in piece offilter paperasillustrated halfway upthebeaker. Fold a the funnelstemisapproximately of theringsothatbottom is inthebeaker. Adjust theheight ring sothatthestemoffunnel ring standandsetthefunnelin ring stand. Attach theringto Place aclean250-mLbeaker onthebaseof Record yourobservations in gentlystirthemixturefor1minute. stirring rod, containing thetablesaltandsand.Using Pour thewater intothe250-mLbeaker Data Table1. A. asillustratedin bottom ofthemeniscus, volume ofthewater to0.1mLbyreadingatthe out 80mLofdistilledwater. Measurethe measure Using a100-mLgraduatedcylinder, to the250-mLbeaker containingthetablesalt. out about5.0gofsand. Then transferthesand measure techniques describedinsteps2and3, sand tothesecond50-mLbeaker. Usingthe transferasmallamountof Using anotherscoop, asindicatedbyyourteacher. waste container, place allexcess tablesaltintoanappropriate Transfer thetablesaltto250-mLbeaker and Data Table1. of theweighingpaperandtablesaltto0.1gin beaker totheweighingpaper. Recordthemass Add about5.0goftablesaltfromthe50-mL mass in to 0.1gusingalaboratorybalance.Recordthis Measure themassofapieceweighingpaper salt toa50-mLbeaker. transferasmallamountoftable Using ascoop, hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr1LaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 1 Figure B. Record thevolume ofwater measuredin 1.1 Data Table1. Place thefoldedfilter Data Table2. Figure Figure B Open intoacone Fold again Fold Figure A 11. 10. 9. the beaker. to passthroughthefilter paperandcollectin allowing theliquid beaker intothefilter cone, keep itinplace.Slowly pourthecontentsof place yourindex finger over thestirringrodto spout. Graspthebeaker withyourhandand spout andextend several inchesbeyond the Figure B. asshown in beaker thatcontainsthemixture, the stirringrodacrosstopof250-mL will pourtheliquiddown astirringrod.Place you To avoid splashingandtomaintaincontrol, record yourobservations in Place thefilter paperonawatch glassand filter coneandcarefullyunfoldthefilter paper. Allow thefilter conetodrain. Then remove the Table 2. cone. Recordyourobservations in remaining solidfromthebeaker intothefilter water bottletorinsethebeaker andwash any usethe While holdingthebeaker atanangle, corner Tear off outer aeClass Date Meniscus LABORATORY MANUAL The stirringrodshouldrestinthe 70 80 90 Data Table2. Stirring rod filtration Setup for Data Funnel Filter paper

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual fromthe“Massof subtractthe“Massofweighingpaper” To find the“Massofsand,” ¥ fromthe“Massof subtractthe“Massofweighingpaper” To find the“Massoftablesalt,” ¥ Data andObservations Hypothesis Name sand table salt Volume of water(mL) Mass ofsand(g) Mass ofweighingpaper(g) Mass ofsand Mass oftablesalt(g) Mass ofweighingpaper(g) Mass oftablesalt tpObservations Step 11 Step 10 Step 7 Step LAB weighing paper.” 1.1 weighing paper.” weighing paper(g) Data Table 1 weighing paper(g) Data Table 2 Cleanup andDisposal 3. 2. 1. Clean upyourwork area Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. waste container. Place allchemicalsintheappropriatelylabeled aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter1 3 4 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 3. 2. 1. LAB performing experiments inthelab? Thinking Critically b. a. Thinking Critically beakers priortoweighing? Drawing aConclusion salt andsandinthe250-mLbeaker andthesamematerialsafterwater was added? Comparing andContrasting reagent bottle? Observing andInferring Error Analysis Why doyounever work aloneinachemicallaboratory? Why mustyoualways wash yourhandsafterworking inalaboratory? orchewing gumnotallowed inalaboratory? drinking, Why iseating, teacher immediately? whyisitnecessarytotellthe If oneofthepiecesbroken glassisdroppedandbreaks, the broken glassimmediately? whyisitnecessarytocleanup If oneofthepiecesglassware isdroppedandbreaks, Chemistry: Matter andChange 1.1 What aresomepossiblesourcesoferrorinthisactivity? Why isitnecessarytowearsafetygogglesandalabapronwhile Why werethesamplesoftablesaltandsandplacedinto50-mL Why weretheexcess reagentsnotputbackintotheoriginal • What differences wereobserved betweenthemixtureof Catr1LaboratoryManual Chapter1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. D Effective UseofaBunsenBurner aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions to bemostefficient? be positionedforheating should abeakerofwater How farfromaflame Problem Name amount ofenergytoboil. In addition,agivenamountofwaterwillalwaysrequirethesame change, theamountofheatprovidedbyflamewillbeaconstant. water willnotchange.Becausetheintensityofflamedoes flame andtheheightofplatformusedtoholdbeaker water. Allotherfactorswillbekeptconstant.Theintensityofthe water abovetheburnerandobservehowlongittakestoboil Bunsen burner. You willvarytheheightofpositionabeaker temperature. Inthisactivity, youwilltesttheeffective useofa Effective UseofaBunsenBurner hypothesis onpage6. position above theflame willbe.Recordyour Hypothesize aboutwhatthemosteffective Read over theentirelaboratoryactivity. dependent variable? Which measurementinthisexperiment isthe What arethevariables inthisexperiment? What aretheconstantsinthisexperiment? LAB uring chemicalorphysicalchanges,energyisoftentransferredin the formofheat.Thistransfercanbemeasuredbyachangein 1.2 LABORATORY MANUAL • Boiling water can burn skin. Boilingwatercanburn • Assumeallglassware ishotandhandlewithgloves. • Nevereatortasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives using athermometer. Measure ruler. Measure using aBunsenburner. Heat a beakerofwater temperature distances usinga 2. 1. Procedure a platformonwhichtoplace thebeaker ofwater. stand. Placethewiregauze ontheringtoprovide Set uparingstandandattach theringto Label four250-mLbeakers three beakers. this processthreemoretimesfortheremaining temperature ofthewater in water intoBeaker 1.Measureandrecordthe measure100mLofdistilled a graduatedcylinder, aeClass Date wire gauze ring ring stand thermometer striker ormatches Bunsen burner 250-mL beakers(4) 100-mL graduated Materials cylinder Data Table1. 1 distilled water hot pad beaker tongsorhot stopwatch orclock ruler , 2 mitts hand with asecond , • 3 Chapter1 and , Section 1.4 4 Use with . Using Repeat 5 6 Figure A Name 9. 8. 7. 5. 4. 3. 6. LAB be yourstartingdistance. Turn off theflame. cone. Referto wire gauzeisnow atthetopofinnerblue Turn ontheflameandadjustheightso pad onyourlabbench. water fromthewiregauze andplaceitonahot carefullyremove thehotbeaker of hot mitts, Turn off theflameandusingbeaker tongsand Table 2. the water toboil.Recordthistimein flame andmeasurethetime(ins)ittakes for Place Beaker 1onthewiregauze.Ignite this distanceas burner tothewiregauzewitharulerandrecord height inner bluecone.Referto wire gauzeisapproximatelyhalfway upthe gauze above theflame. Adjust theheightso the ringstandandobserve theheightofwire move theburner to After youadjusttheflame, the Bunsenburner. have additionaldirectionsontheoperationof cool andneedsmoreoxygen. Your teachermay inner light-bluecone. A yellow flameistoo oxygen flow sothattheflameisbluewithan adjustthegasflow and When theflameislit, of theburner nozzletolightthegas. the gas.Holdmatchclosetobottomside lightthematchfirst beforeturningon a match, and usingthestriker toignitethegas.Ifyouuse Light theburner byfirst turningonthegasflow the hosedoesnothave any cracksorholes. the Bunsenburner tothegasinlet.Make sure Use burner connectorsafetytubingtoconnect Chemistry: Matter andChange Bunsen burner (pale violet) Outer flame 1.2 Inner flame (blue cone) . Estimatethedistancefromtopof Figure A, Test 1 in Data Table2. Figure A, Test 2height • Catr1LaboratoryManual Chapter1 Test 1height Test 2height Test 3height Test 4height Test 1 Data . Estimate This will 12. 11. 10. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 15. 14. 13. 3. 2. 1. flame. This willbeyourstartingdistance. Turn off the ruler andrecordthisdistancein top oftheburner tothewiregauzewith will be12cm.Estimatethedistancefrom thentheheight fortest4 number 3was 9cm, number 2was 6cmandtheheightfortest the height fortest starting positionwas 3cm, distance in wire gauzewiththerulerandrecordthis the distancefromtopofburner tothe Repeat steps6Ð8usingBeaker 3. off theflame. and recordthisdistancein of theburner tothewiregauzewithruler burner top.Estimatethedistancefromtop then thenew positionwillbe9cmabove the 3 cmandthetopofinnerblueconeis6cm, Figure A, halfway uptheinnerbluecone.Referto was positionedfromthestartingdistance, from thetopofinnerblueconeas wire gauzeisnow positionedthesamedistance Turn ontheflameandadjustheightso Repeat steps6Ð8usingBeaker 2. Clean upyourwork area. Return alllabequipmentto itsproperplace. Clean anddryallglassware. the sinkanddryglassware. empty thewater in When thebeakers arecool, Repeat steps6Ð8usingBeaker 4. Figure A, the samedistanceincrementasbefore.Referto wire gauzeismoved toanew positionthatis Turn ontheflameandadjustheightso aeClass Date o xml,ifthestartingdistance was For example, LABORATORY MANUAL Test 3height Test 4height Data Table2. . o xml,ifthe . For example, Turn off theflame. Data Table2. Data Table2. Turn

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name ekrStartingtemperature ofwater(°C) Beaker LAB beaker ofwater afterthetestbut notbefore the test? Thinking Critically gauze was placedatthetipofinnerbluecone? Drawing aConclusion results ofthefourtests? Comparing andContrasting Thinking Critically Thinking Critically Observing andInferring 4 3 2 1 1.2 Data Table 1 Why was itnecessarytousebeaker tongsorhot mittstoremove the Why isthetimetogetwater toboilthedependentvariable? Why istheheightofwiregauzeindependentvariable? Why didittake lesstimeforthewater toboilwhen thewire Why didyouturnoff theburner betweenexperiment setups? What observed differences didyounoteamongthe etaoeBne unr(m Timetoboil(s) aboveBunsenburner(cm) Test 4 3 2 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Height ofwire gauze Data Table 2 • Chapter1 7 8 7. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB Error Analysis the wrongapproach? would holdingathermometerintheflamebe produced byaBunsenburner flame. Why Suppose youwanted tomeasuretheheat Chemistry: Matter andChange 1.2 What aresomesourcesoferrorinthisactivity? • Catr1LaboratoryManual Chapter1 2. to theburner didnothave any holesorcracks? Why didyouchecktomake surethatthehose aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. D Density aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions to measuretheirvolumes? using waterdisplacement densities ofobjectsby How canyoufindthe Problem Name terms ofg/mLorg/cm of asubstance.Densitiesliquidsandsolidsareusuallyexpressedin in waterwilldisplaceavolumeofequaltoitsvolume. with waterisbydisplacement.Anitemthatentirelysubmerged volume ofanirregularlyshapeditemthatdoesnotdissolveinorreact the volumemustbedeterminedindirectly. Oneway tomeasurethe length measurements.However, mostobjectshaveirregularshapes,and shape, suchasacubeorcylinder, volumecanbecalculatedfrom Mass canbedeterminedbyusingabalance.Iftheobjecthasregular substance toitsvolume.Densitycanbecomputedbyusingtheequation Density hypothesis thatcomparesthe densitiesofa stopper tothedensityofwater. Form asecond hypothesis thatcomparesthe densityofarubber Read theentirelaboratory activity. Form a What unitsareassociatedwithdensity? Write themathematicalexpression ofdensity. Define LAB It isnecessarytousetheproperunitswhencalculatingdensity Mass andvolumemeasurementscanbemadeinthelaboratory. ensity isaphysicalpropertyofsubstanceandoftenusedto identify whatthesubstanceis.Densityisratioofmassa density 2.1 . LABORATORY MANUAL 3 . Densitiesofgasesareusuallyexpresseding/L. density Donoteatordrinkanythinginalaboratory. • Cleanupanyspillsimmediately. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives various objects. Compare ured massandvolume. objects byusingtheirmeas- Calculate objects. volume ofseveraldifferent Measure volume mass the massand the densitiesof the densityof 5. 4. The densityofaluminumis 2.70g/cm your hypothesesonpage10. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow totest volume will13.5grams ofaluminumoccupy? Record yourhypotheses. non-diet softdrinkandadiettowater. aeClass Date rubber stopper distilled water balance 2-L graduated 100-mL graduated Materials (#2 solid) cylinder cylinder dropper can ofdietsoft can ofnon-diet drink soft drink • Chapter2 Section 2.4 3 . What Use with 9 10 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. of Water Density Part A: Procedure Name atC Density ofaCanNon-DietSoftDrink Part C: DensityofaRubberStopper Part B: LAB Read andrecordtheexact volume. submerged. makingsurethatitiscompletely cylinder, Place thecanofsoftdrinkintograduated the exact volume. 2000-mL graduatedcylinder. Readand record Pour about1000mLoftapwater intothe soft drink.Recordthismassin Find themassofanunopenedcannon-diet Read andrecordtheexact volume. water.) to holdthestopperjustundersurface ofthe submerged. (You mightusethepointofapencil cylinder. Make surethatitiscompletely Place therubberstopperintograduated the exact volume. 100-mL graduatedcylinder. Readand record Pour about50mLoftapwater intothe Record thismassin Find themassofasolid#2rubberstopper. Calculate andrecordthemassofwater. cylinder andwater. Find andrecordthemassofgraduated exactly tothe100.0-mLmark. dropper toadjustthebottomofmeniscus Fill thecylinder withdistilledwater. Usea cylinder. Recordthismassin dry100-mLgraduated Find themassofaclean, Chemistry: Matter andChange 2.1 Data Table2. Data Table1. Data Table3. • Catr2LaboratoryManual Chapter2 atD DensityofaCanDietSoftDrink Part D: Hypotheses 4. 3. 2. 1. lc,asdirectedbyyourteacher. place, Return allmaterialsandsuppliestotheirproper Cleanup andDisposal Read andrecordtheexact volume. submerged. makingsurethatitiscompletely cylinder, Place thecanofdietsoftdrinkintograduated the exact volume. 2000-mL graduatedcylinder. Readandrecord Pour about1000mLoftapwater intothe drink. Recordthismassin Find themassofanunopenedcandietsoft aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table4.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Name Density ofrubberstopper(g/mL) Volume of rubberstopper(mL) Final volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Initial volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Mass ofrubberstopper(g) Density ofwater(g/mL) Volume ofwater(mL) Mass ofwater(g) Mass ofgraduatedcylinderandwater(g) Mass ofemptygraduatedcylinder(g) Density ofcandietsoftdrink (g/mL) Volume ofcandietsoftdrink(mL) Final volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Initial volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Mass ofcandietsoftdrink(g) Density ofcannon-dietsoftdrink(g/mL) Volume of canofnon-dietsoftdrink(mL) Final volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Initial volumeofwateringraduatedcylinder(mL) Mass ofcannon-dietsoftdrink(g) LAB 2.1 atC DensityofaCanNon-DietSoftDrink Part C: atD DensityofaCanDietSoft Drink Part D: atB DensityofRubberStopper Part B: Part A: Density of Water Density Part A: Data Table 4 Data Table 3 Data Table 2 Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter2 11 12 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. UsingNumbers 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB your measurements? can ofdietsoftdrink? Hypothesizing Drawing Conclusions Explain. Predicting into agraduatedcylinder thatwas half-filled withwater? Observing andInferring values inthedatatables. andacanofdietsoftdrink.Recordthese acanofnon-dietsoftdrink, the rubberstopper, ihtesm oue whatpropertyoftheobjectsareyouactuallycomparing? with thesamevolume, Error Analysis an imitationdiamond? differentiate betweenagenuinediamondand How cantheconceptofdensitybeusedto Chemistry: Matter andChange 2.1 Would youexpect thedensitiesofvarious fruitjuicestoallbethesame? Why doyouthinkthecanofnon-dietsoftdrinkismoredensethan What couldhave beendonetoimprove theprecisionandaccuracy of Use themassandvolume datatocalculatethedensitiesofwater, When youusetheterms Did thevolume ofwater changewhenanobjectwas placed • Catr2LaboratoryManual Chapter2 heavier 2. yeo aeil suchassteel. type ofmaterial, but onlypartially filled withasecond butter, suchas filled withonetypeofmerchandise, Explain whyatractor-trailer canbecompletely or lighter aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL to compareobjects

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. D Making aGraph aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions plotted? beyond theinitialdata graph provideinformation on agraph?Howcanthis How candatabedisplayed Problem Name a graph,whichisthe performed. Theindependentvariableisplottedonthehorizontalaxisof changes thattakeplaceordependuponthewayexperimentis which iscalledthe beyond themeasuredpointsthroughaprocesscalledextrapolation. called interpolation.Graphscanalsobeusedtoestimatedatapoints values forpointsthatfallbetweenthoseactuallymeasured.Thisprocessis understand andanalyze.Withalinegraph,itispossibletoestimate the datathathasbeencollected.Graphscanmakeknownfactseasierto activity andorganizedinadatatable. between twosetsofvalues.Thesevaluepairsareoftencollectedinalab used inscienceisthelinegraph.Agraphshowsrelationship points anddrawafineline. that yourgraphisneatandeasytoread.Useasharppencilestablish Making aGraph interpolation. Differentiate betweenextrapolation and a dependentvariable. Distinguish betweenanindependent variable and graph. State thedifference betweenadatatableand LAB The dependentvariableisplottedontheverticalaxisofalinegraph, The resultsofanexperimentareoftenshownonagraphthatdisplays In thisactivity, youwillcollectdataanddrawaline graph.Becertain ifferent typesofgraphsmaybedrawntoillustratethedata measured duringanexperiment.Themostcommontypeofgraph 2.2 y -axis. Thequantitiesdisplayedonthisaxisreflectthe LABORATORY MANUAL x -axis. Openflamesmayignitehairorlooseclothing. • Hotobjectsmaynotappeartobehot. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • • • • Objectives measured quantities. Interpolate Graph boiling point. water isheatedtoits a mixtureoficeand changes thatoccurwhen Measure experimental data. the temperature data between 5. 4. water. Predict theanticipatedboiling temperatureof your hypothesisonpage15. hypothesis abouttheshape ofyourgraph.Record Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a aeClass Date stirring rod Celsius thermometer thermometer clamp ring stand hot plate Materials distilled water graph paper crushed ice beaker tongs 250-mL beaker • Chapter2 Section 2.4 Use with 13 14 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Data Gathering Part A: Procedure Name atB MakingtheGraph Part B: LAB pcs justtotheoutsideofgraph. spaces, notthe intervals. Besuretonumberthelines, represent 10¡C.Numberthe how many squaresalongthe to thenext highestinteger. This integer tellsyou roundthevalue quotient isnotawholenumber, 10-degree unitsinthetemperature range.Ifthe whichis thenumberof number ofsquaresby12, number ofsquaresalongtheaxis.Divide the Establish ascaleforthe the graph. Labelthe draw andlabeltheaxes ofthe On graphpaper, Turn off thehotplate. at whichthewater boils. the iceiscompletelymeltedandtemperature In you mightneedtoaddadditionalrows. not usealltheavailable spacein take five additionalreadings. Youoccur, might intervals. When nofurthertemperaturechanges Measure andrecordthetemperatureat1-minute continuously. iceÐwater mixture.StirtheiceÐwater mixture andbegin heatingthe Turn onthehotplate, Table 1. start thetimer. Recordthistemperaturein thenmeasurethetemperatureand Wait 1minute, beaker. mometer doesnottouchthesideorbottomof the thermometertoringstandsothatther- thermometer intotheiceÐwater mixture.Clamp andinsertthe Place thebeaker onthehotplate, rod. Stir theiceÐwater mixturewellwiththestirring mixture uptothe200-mLline. Add enoughdistilledwater tobringtheiceÐwater is aboutthree-fourthsfullofice. Pack crushediceintothebeaker untilthebeaker 10¡C andcontinuingto110¡C.Countthe Data Table2, x Chemistry: Matter andChange -axis “Time (min).” 2.2 y record thetemperatureatwhich ai Tmeaue(C. Label -axis “Temperature (¡C).” y ai,beginning at -axis, y y -axis at10-degree -axis ofthegraph Data Table1, • Catr2LaboratoryManual Chapter2 Data or 5. 4. 3. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 6. atC ComputerGraphing (optional) Part C: above thelineasbelow theline. attempt tohave asmany dataentriesrepresented where thepointsdonotfall exactly ontheline, Incases smooth curve torepresentthe“bestfit.” draw a If thepointsdonotfall inastraightline, Draw alinethatrepresentsthebestfit ofthedata. small circledrawn aroundit. table. Show eachsetofdataasapointwith Plot eachpairofvalues thatareshown in the data the axis. 5-minute intervals. Placethenumbersoutside the integer. Assign thisvalue toeachsquarealong roundthevalue tothenext highest number, was collected.Ifthequotientisnotawhole squares bythetotalnumberofminutesthatdata squares alongtheaxis.Divide thenumberof that datawas recorded.Countthenumberof 0 minandcontinuingtothenumberofminutes Establish ascaleforthe Selectcolorchoice(ifaprinter is being ¥ SelectSHADING AND COLOR ¥ Go toFORMAT SelectOK. ¥ Title the Y axis“Celsius Temp.” ¥ Title theXaxis“Time (Min.).” ¥ SelectTITLES ¥ Go toEDIT Select OK Title thegraph“Heating Water.” Check gridlines. Select Click thegraphicon. Highlight thetwo columnsofnumericaldata. Enter alldataontoacomputerspreadsheet. computer programorgraphingcalculator. tions orusethosethatspecifically applytoyour graph thedata. You canusethefollowing instruc- graphing calculatorconnectedtoaprinter youcanuseacomputeror As anoption, used). Blackisthedefault color. x aeClass Date -axis ofthegraph.Number X - Y LABORATORY MANUAL GRAPH. x ai,beginning at -axis, x -axis at

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations 11. 10. Name odto Temperature (°C) Water boils Ice completelymelts Condition LAB ie(i)Tm.(C ie(i)Tm.(C ie(i)Tm.(°C) Temp. Time(min) (°C) Temp. Time(min) (°C) Temp. Time (min) Paste graphintoaword processingdocument ¥ SelectPASTE. ¥ SelectCOPY. ¥ Go toEDIT. SelectCLOSE. ¥ SelectFORMAT. ¥ SelectHOLLOW CIRCLEasthemarker ¥ SelectSOLIDasthepatternchoice. ¥ fgahi opee printthedocumentto Ifgraphiscomplete, ¥ SelectPRINTPREVIEW. ¥ gotoFILE. As anoptiontostep10, to submitwiththelabreport. choice. submit withthelabreport. 918278172671625615245142341322312212112011019 2.2 Data Table 2 Data Table 1 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Be suretheheatsourceisturnedoff. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter2 15 Name Date Class

LAB 2.2 LABORATORY MANUAL

Analyze and Conclude

1. Using Numbers Calculate the Celsius temperature change between the melting point of the ice and the boiling point of the water. Fahrenheit is another commonly used temperature scale. The interval between the melting point of the ice and the boiling point of the water is 180¡F. How many Fahrenheit degrees are equal to one Celsius degree?

2. Observing and Inferring Why were you instructed to wait 1 minute after inserting the thermometer into the ice water before starting to record data?

3. Making a Prediction What do you think would happen to the temperature of the water if heating at the boiling point continued for an additional 5 minutes?

4. Interpreting Data Using your graph, interpolate how much time would elapse before a temperature of 50¡C would be reached.

5. Drawing Conclusion What purpose does a graph serve?

6. Making Predictions Predict which data would change and which data would stay the same if a less intense source of heat was used.

7. Error Analysis Why might the recorded boiling temperature of water be greater or less than 100¡C?

Real-World Chemistry

1. Hypothesize about why the Celsius temperature 3. Explain why a line graph might not be appro- scale was previously called the Centigrade scale. priate to show the chemical composition of ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. 2. Graphs of ongoing data, such as temperature Earth’s crust. changes in a 24-hour period, are often recorded mechanically. Describe how this process might be done automatically.

16 Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 2 Laboratory Manual Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. wood bedetermined? can theidentityof volume ofblockswood, By measuringthemassand Problem The Densityof Wood aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name the densityofapiecewood,youcanidentifyspecificsample. matter thatisoftenusedforidentifyingsubstances.Bydetermining properties canbeeither. Densityisanimportantphysicalpropertyof or extensive.Allchemicalpropertiesareintensive,butphysical Chemists classifyphysicalandchemicalpropertiesaseitherintensive W The Densityof Wood c. b. a. Review theequationsforcalculating Record yourhypothesisonpage18. of thesametypewood. Explainwhyornot. densities tobedifferent fordifferent sizedblocks hypothesis astowhetherornotyouexpect the Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a sive properties. Give two examples eachofintensive andexten- properties. Compare andcontrastintensive andextensive LAB slope forastraightline. density frommassandvolume. volume ofarectangularblock. ood isprizedforitsphysicalproperties,suchasstrength, compressibility, hardness,density, color, orgrainpattern. 3.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Beaware ofpossiblesplinteringonthewoodenblocks. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives ical relationship. illustrate themathemat- mass versusvolumeto Make andusegraphs measurements. of woodfromthese Calculate of wood. volume ofseveralblocks Measure the massand the density of 3. 2. 1. Procedure data table. letter codes)andrecordthe informationinthe samples ofthesametypewood (having thesame Repeat yourobservations withtwo otherblock significant figures. applytherulesof lating volumes anddensities, their massestothenearest0.01g. When calcu- record theirlengthstothenearest0.01cmand Measure theblockscarefully. Inthedatatable, at atime. chooseonlyonesample tomeasure measured, A-3)willeventually be A-2, A-1, example, three different blocks ofthesameletter(for Select ablockfromthematerialstable. Although aeClass Date balance wood samplesof Materials balsa, andcedar oak, whitepine, CRC Handbookof metric ruler Physics Chemistry and • Chapter3 Section 3.1 (optional) Use with 17 18 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations Hypothesis Name apeOsrain eghHih it oueMs est Average Density Mass Volume Width Height Length Observations Sample LAB look like anothervalue youhave previously calculated. Which oneisit? Find theslopeofline. What aretheunitsforslope? The value oftheslopeshould Using Numbers label bothaxes withunits andgive yourgraphatitle. Graphing Data a. Classify eachofthefollowing asanintensive orextensive propertyofthewood samples: colored wood. if any ofthewood types emitadistinctodororareknown asalight-coloredordark- find out averaged densityandyourqualitative observations aboutthesample.For example, woods yoursamplemightrepresent. andcedar.Your Recordtheseranges.Decidewhichofthe answershouldbebasedonbothyourcalculated balsa, whitepine, oak, four woods: Using the blocks. Calculate thedensitiesforeachofblocksandthenaverage density forallthree Provide justification foryourclassification. D(m c)(m (cm (cm) (cm) (cm) ID color; Chemistry: Matter andChange 3.1 b. CRC Handbook smell; Make agraphofvolume versus massforeachoftheblocks.Besureto sn h he ons draw thebest-fit straightlinethroughthepoints. Using thethreepoints, c. grain patternofthewood; raohrtbeo este,find thedensitiesforeachof or anothertableofdensities, • Catr3LaboratoryManual Chapter3 d. mass; 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal e. condition asyoufoundit. Make sureyourbalanceisleftinthesame Return thewood blockstothematerialstable. volume; and aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 3 g (g/cm (g) ) f. density. 3 Density(g/cm ) 3 )

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB ro,ifany. Listatleasttwo possiblesourcesoferrorinthelab. error, in the samples. Compareyouraverage densityforthethreesampleswithrangegiven why youthinkdensityisanintensive orextensive property. to thechangeinmassdivided bythechangeinvolume. Usethisinformationtoexplain theslopeissame. You shouldfind thattheslopeisequal measure theslopeonline, Drawing aConclusion Error Analysis opr hs ihhrwos such aselmor compare thesewithhardwoods, and suchasspruceor juniper, softwood trees, uous trees.Lookupthedensitiesofsome hardwood ifthey were lumberedfromdecid- fied assoftwood ifthey comefromconifersor Different typesofwoods aregenerallyclassi- densities. same typeofwood mightvary slightlyintheir explain whysamplesofthe anddisease, fall, amountofrain- humidity, such astemperature, of wood. Intermsofenvironmental conditions rather thansinglevalues forthedifferent types Physics In the CRC HandbookofChemistryandPhysics 3.1 CRC HandbookofChemistryand thedensitiesarerecordedasranges, , Find outfromyourteacherwhetheryoucorrectlyidentified yourwood The slopeofastraightlineisconstant.Nomatterwhereyou or byyourteacher. Calculatethepercent 3. its density. connection betweenthehardnessofwood and poplar. Explainwhetherornotyouseea extensive? Why? categorize thesepropertiesasintensive or making thesoundboardsofpianos. Would you itisawood usedin spruce hashighelasticity, wood iselasticityandresonance.Because baseball bats. Another physicalpropertyof are sotoughthatthey areusedformaking sudden andrepeatedstress.Hickory andash ameasureofstrengthagainst toughness, An importantphysicalpropertyofwood is Wood hasmany valuable physicalproperties. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter3 19

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. L Properties of Water aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions change overphasechange? capacity, anddensity boiling point,specificheat three propertiesofwater: What isuniqueaboutthese Problem Name makes waterunique. By exploringafewofthepropertieswater, youwilldiscoverwhat (solid, liquid,andgas)atthetemperaturesnormallyfoundonEarth. only naturalsubstancethatisfoundinallthreestatesofmatter able tofindliquidwateranywhereotherthanonEarth.Water isthe in atmospheressuchasthatonVenus. However, noonehasbeen Properties of Water Read theentirelaboratory activity. Form a Review theequation forcalculatingdensity. b. Define thefollowing terms: Describe hydrogenbondingandboilingpoint. iscolorless. hasnoodor, neutral, hasa pHthatis has densityofabout1g/mL, exhibits highspecific heatcapacity, boiling point, hashigh actsasauniversal solvent, physical: water. Classifythepropertiesaschemicalor The following isapartiallistoftheproperties LAB iquid waterisdifficult tofindintheuniverse.Scientistshave found frozeniceinplacessuchasMarsandgaseouswatervapor heat; and 3.2 c. specific heatcapacity. LABORATORY MANUAL a. Hotobjectswillnotappeartobehot.Becareful when • Hairandlooseclothingmustbetiedback. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • • Objectives water andice. the densitiesofliquid Calculate of sandwiththatwater. Compare time data. pret graph, Collect, boiling pointofwater. Graph temperature; handling thesandandwaterafterheating. temperature versus the estimated the heatcapacity and compare and inter- (VA) families. Notethat theboilingpointofH hydrogen inthem)ofthecarbon (IVA) andoxygen the boilingpointofhydrides(compoundswith whichcompares Look atthetableonnext page, Procedure Part A: weights. tures ofthecompoundsversus theirmolecular missing. Plotonagraphthe boilingpointtempera- Record yourhypothesisonpage24. higher orlower densitythantheofwater. hypothesis astowhetherthedensityoficewillbe aeClass Date thermometer sand Bunsen burner wire gauze ring standand 2 beakers(400-mL) Materials clamp Boiling Point water graph paper 50-mL graduated balance timer orstopwatch cylinder • Chapter3 Section 3.2 Use with 2 O is 21 22 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure Part B: 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude predictandplotthe From thedata, Data andObservations Name LAB Slide theburner under thesandandbegin timing. that itismediumhotwith a large lightbluecone. Light theBunsenburner andadjusttheflameso set upanapparatussimilartotheoneinFigure A. While waiting forthetemperaturetoequilibrate, thermometer. then remove the temperature inyourdatatable, equilibrate forapproximately1min.Recordthe Place athermometerinthesandandallow itto put300gofsand. another beaker, put300gofwater. In In one400-mLbeaker, bonding? Drawing Conclusions bonding? orgas)would water exist atroomtemperature(25¡C)withouthydrogen liquid, (solid, Making andUsingGraphs water? How many degrees different isthisfromtheactualboilingpointofwater? Interpreting Data Chemistry: Matter andChange 3.2 Specific HeatCapacity h abnFml,GopIAEeet h xgnFml,Group VA Elements TheOxygenFamily, Group IVA Elements The CarbonFamily, opudBiigpit° opudBoilingpoint°C Compound Boilingpoint°C Compound GeH SnH SiH CH rmtegahddt,whatisyourpredictedboilingpointfor From thegrapheddata, 4 4 4 4 What doesthisexercise tellyouaboutthepower ofhydrogen codn oyu rdce oln on,inwhatstate According toyourpredictedboilingpoint, expected • Catr3LaboratoryManual Chapter3 1 H H 112 164 2H H 52 90 boiling pointofwater. 6. i”temperature in 1 min” reached andthenrecordthis asthe“After heating Wait until thehighesttemperaturehasbeen sand sothatthebulb is inthecenterofsand. and immediatelyplacethethermometerin shutoff theburner Heat thesandfor1min. Then, aeClass Date 2 2 2 2 Se Te Predict O S LABORATORY MANUAL Ring stand Data Table1. Bunsen burner Ring clamp Wire gauze sand Beaker with 41 61 2 Figure A

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations 10. Name 9. 8. 7. After cooling120s After cooling90s After cooling60s After cooling30s After heating1min Initial temperature LAB is nlgto hs explain how andwhywater isused asacoolantincarradiators. ties. Inlightofthis, Applying Concepts Explain theirsignificance. Interpreting Data lostitsheatmorerapidly? sandorwater, Which substance, requiredlessheattoraiseitstemperature? sandorwater, Which substance, curve. Make sureyou placetheindependentvariable onthe data. You shouldhave four points eachforsandandwater. This graph iscalledacooling make agraphoftime versus temperatureforyouraftercooling On asheetofgraphpaper, to itsprevious settingsforthebeaker ofsand. any adjustments. The burner shouldbeidentical but DONOT make Turn theBunsenburner on, to equilibrateforabout1min. Place thethermometerinwater andallow it Set asidethebeaker ofsand. 30 sforatotalof120s. start timingandrecordingthetemperatureevery immediately After recordingthetemperature, 3.2 Discuss thedifferences inthecoolingcurves forsandandwater. falkonsbtne,water hasoneofthehighestheatcapaci- Of allknown substances, adtmeaue(C Water temperature (°C) Sand temperature (°C) Data Table 1 Turn burneroff Cleanup andDisposal 11. 2. 1. designated container. Carefully returnthewarm sandtothe Do notallow thesandtogodown thedrain. water. timing. Repeatsteps5Ð8usingthebeaker of Slide theburner underthewater andbegin x -axis. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter3 23 24 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Hypothesis 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure Part C: Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB improve theprecisionandaccuracy ofyourmeasurements? h ouecags explain how thiswillaffect thedensity. the volume changes, Recognizing CauseandEffect Calculate thedensityforbothwater andice. the freezer. volume oftheiceassoonitisremoved from recordthemassand On thefollowing day, overnight. Place thegraduatedcylinder inthefreezer and the49.0mLofwater. In graduated cylinder. Pour exactly 49.0mLoftapwater inaplastic cylinder. 50-Lgraduated dry, Obtain themassofaclean, Error Analysis grapes aregrown nearwater? such asrivers orlakes. Why doyouthink grapesaregrown nearbodiesofwater, Usually, cannot tolerateweathertoohotorcold. climates becausethegrapesandtheirvines Wine grapesmustbegrown intemperate Data Table2, Chemistry: Matter andChange 3.2 Density record themassofcylinder Was yourhypothesissupported?Explain. What couldbedoneto • Catr3LaboratoryManual Chapter3 If themassremainsconstantforwater andicebut 2. Data andObservations hot water over theoutside. Loosen theiceingraduatedcylinder byrunning Cleanup andDisposal Mass ofice Mass ofthecylinder Density ofwater Volume ofwater Mass ofwater Mass ofthecylinder Mass ofthegraduatedcylinder Density ofice Volume of ice riorate highways soviciously. Explain how oneofwater’s propertiescandete- major contributors totheformationofpotholes. Moisture andchangingtemperaturesarethe aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table 2 ice water

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. I Foil Experiment Foil Simulation ofRutherford’s Gold aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Procedure 2. 1. Pre-Lab atomic nucleus? What isthesizeofan Problem Name data, youwillestimatethesizeofagoldatom trajectory ofanalphaparticle( positive chargeandmostofitsmass.Inthislab,youwillcalculatethe atom, nowknownasthenucleus,thatcontainsallofatom They concludedthattheremustbeasmallregioninthecenterof when someofthealphaparticlesweredeflectedatverylargeangles. deflection ofthealphaparticles,GeigerandRutherfordwerestartled scattered afterhittingathinsheetofgoldfoil.Expectinglittleorno atom Foil Experiment Foil Simulation ofRutherford’s Gold n 1910,Rutherford structure oftheatombyobservinghowabeamalphaparticles nucleus ismuch moremassive than the 0). Assume thatthegoldatom the origin(0, dard and thegoldatomnucleus areshown onastan- Look at the nucleus? deflects dependsonthe theanglethroughwhichit atom’s nucleus, say thatwhenan Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Isitcorrectto pudding model. nuclear atomicmodelthatreplacedtheplum- pudding modeltobeinerror?Describethe How didthegoldfoil experiment show theplum- book. Describetheplum-puddingatomicmodel. Read aboutthegoldfoilexperiment inyourtext- LAB ’ s nucleus.UsingthistrajectoryandsomeofGeiger x - y Figure A. grid. The goldatomnucleusislocatedat 4.1 The positionsofthe -particle passesnearagold ’ LABORATORY MANUAL s collaboratorHansGeigerwasinvestigatingthe -particle’s distance from • • Objectives Geiger gold atom Estimate gold atom. near thenucleusofa an Calculate -particle) asitpassesnearagold -particle asitpasses ’ s data. the sizeofa -particle the trajectoryof -particle ’ s nucleususing ’ s nucleus. 2. x change. The initialposition of the and thatthepositionofnucleusdoesnot and a x The significant figures forallcalculationsinthelab. Data Table1. relationship atom nucleusandthe Calculate thedistance( positions ofthegoldatomnucleusand path at1.33 determined byadvancing the ( unknown value tobedeterminedisthefinal angle contains initialvalues for -axis withan -particle on ’ ) ofthe s original aeClass Date graph paper pencil calculator Materials y -particle isinitiallytraveling paralleltothe 6.000 -velocity ( ’ s -particle. The value of r Figure B. x Use aprecisionofatleast four 10 10 -velocity ( v y 13 20 ( ) ofzero. x 2 m and s intervals. Plottheinitial -particle byusingthe r ) betweenthegold y x v 2 , x ) y ) of1.500 y . Recordtheresultin Data Table1 , v -particle alongits • x 2.000 and , Chapter4 -particle is will be Section 4.2 v y Use with . The 10 10 7 13 m/s m. 25 26 Figure B Figure A Name 4. 3. y-position ( 10 13 m) -particle LAB 0 1 2 3 4 nti qain the(1/ In thisequation, y converts thetotalvelocity change( on the change invelocity isproportionaltotheforce 1.33 Remember thatthetimestep( proportionality constant7.311 the time interval used. accounts forthecharges of the particlesand Calculate thenext by thegoldatomnucleus. The ( electrostatic repulsionforceonthe Calculate thechangein -component ofthevelocity change( -particle usingtheequationshown below. The -particle usingtheequationshown below. 6 Chemistry: Matter andChange v x x -position 4.1 -particle foundin Initial v y 10 y Initial -particle. -position 20 (7.311 x s. Usetheinitialvalue of new y 4 x Gold atomnucleus T -position ( r

x a 10

old j e Data Table1. r c y

2 t -velocity ( o ) termrepresentsthe 20 r y ( m o v

f x x 3 )( 20 /s)(1/ new y

t - •

p ) is / Catr4LaboratoryManual Chapter4 10

r a t ) ofthe r ) term ) t i c r v -particle l v e 2 20 ) intothe y )( v ) ofthe y v m y angle Final ). The x / r 3 x for ) /s -position ( x 12. 11. 10. 8. 7. 6. 5. 9. 10 trajectory andtheequationshown below. using thelasttwo pointsofthe equation instep2andsubstituting In thisequation, Calculate thenew Calculate thenew for Calculate thenew distancebetweenthe Calculate thenext Determine thefinal angle( complete. Repeat steps4Ð10until Figure B. Plot thenew location ofthe Calculate substituting equation shown below. constant speedthroughoutitstrajectory. It isassumedthatthe of 13 -particle andhasavalue of1.5 -particle andthenucleus( -particle byusingtheequationinstep4and 2468 v aeClass Date v y m) x acltdi tp3 totheprevious value calculatedinstep3, , y 1/tan((y and found in LABORATORY MANUAL y respectively. , v last new y y for as doneinstep3. Data Table1. v v x y x x y y next-to-last throughout. -velocity (new -velocity (new is thespeedof -position ( -particle maintainsa Data Table1 ( v )/(x r 2 ) ofthe new -particle in y last new ) byusingthe v -particle’s y ) ofthe 2 v v x ) x y 10 new ) usingthe ) byadding x -particle next-to-last is 7 and m/s. y new ))

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations Name Initial LAB y data points.Labelthisgraph spreadsheet.) Graphtheinitial 1.5 Data Table2 What value of What was theinitial ( 6.000 -direction distancebetweenthe ° x 931. 0282675749423733292.6 2.9 3.3 3.7 4.2 4.9 5.7 6.7 8.2 10.2 13.3 19.3 ) -position x y (m) -position (10 10 4.1 10 Angle 13 15.6 12.4 13 m to7.0 9.0 5.6 2.8 shows values of did youobtaininstep12? ° Initial (°) 2.000 y 13 psto betweenparticles -position y y )15202530354045505560657.0 6.5 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 m) -position ofthe (m) 10 10 13 Figure C. 13 y m. (You maylike toperformthesecalculationsona -position versus that areobtainedforinitial -particle andthenucleus? Distance Change in -particle? How isthispositionrelatedtothe r ———— (m) Data Table 1 Data Table 3 Data Table 2 y -position and draw asmoothcurve throughthe 1.500 y x (10 v -velocity x y (m/s) -position values of aeClass Date 13 10 )Detected m) 7 LABORATORY MANUAL y v -velocity 0.000 y (m/s) -particles perminute 212 316 330 247 98 • Chapter4 y -velocity v y (m/s) 27 28 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 4. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB Data Table3. radius ofagoldatomnucleusfrom gold atomnucleusmustbesmallerthanthisvalue. Determinetheupperboundon the atom nucleuswiththecurrentlyacceptedradiusofapproximately6 per minutegiven in sources oferrormightaccountforthedifference inthevalues? until itintersectsthe Figure D. Collecting andInterpreting Data initial This dataisfromascientific paperwrittenbyHansGeiger. Use Data Table3 Error Analysis aluminum atomsthickistheprimarylayer? how many aluminum atomis2.5angstroms, and is1.0mmthick.Ifthediameterofan layers. The primarylayeris madeofaluminum A computerdiskdrive iscomposedofmany x Chemistry: Matter andChange -axis isan y 4.1 -position foreachvalue ofthe Extend astraightdashedlinethatpassesthroughthefirst two datapointsback shows theoriginaldatafromgoldfoilexperiment performedin1910. Plot theinitial upper bound Compare yourexperimentally determinedvalue fortheradiusofagold Data Table3. x -axis. The value forinitial o h ieo odao ulu.Ta s theradiusofa for thesizeofagoldatomnucleus. That is, y -position values againstthenumberofdetected • Label thisgraph Catr4LaboratoryManual Chapter4 Figure D Draw asmoothlinethroughthedatapointsin given inGeiger’s data.Recordeachestimatein and recordthevalue below. y -position wherethedashedlineintersects Figure D. 3. 2. layer. the thicknessofcomputerdiskprimary Explain whatoccupiestheremainingspacein 4 If thediameterofaluminumnucleuswas Al atoms? ness isactuallyoccupiedbythenucleiof aeClass Date 10 Figure C 15 LABORATORY MANUAL ,how muchofthe1.0mmthick- m, 10 to estimatethe 15 m. What -particles

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. N aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions 137 What isthehalf-lifeof Problem Half-life ofBarium-137 Name investigate thedecayof for theactivityofsampletodropby50%.Inthisactivity, youwill This periodiscalledahalf-life. sample ofradioactivematerialdecayswithinaknowntimeperiod. much timeitwilltaketoprepareabatchofpopcorn.Similarly, a popping processispredictableinthesensethatyoucansayhow random process,muchlikeradioactivedecay. However, thecorn- pop atanygiveninstant,andinthiswaythepoppingofcornisa form whenitdecays. kernel pops,itchangesform.Similarly, anunstablenucleuschanges popcorn kernelinabatchofthatisbeingheated.When An unstablenucleusinasampleofradioactivematerialislike undergoes gammadecaywithahalf-lifeofseveralminutes. Half-life ofBarium-137 Ba metastable isomerofstrontium thatundergoes counts permin(cpm).Consider decay rateofaradioisotope isoftenexpressed in the rateatwhichgammaraysareemitted. The emits agammaray. A gamma raydetectorcounts A nuclidethatundergoes agammadecayevent LAB The half-lifeofaradioactivespeciesisdefinedasthetimeittakes It ispracticallyimpossibletopredictwhichparticularkernelwill uclear decayisarandomprocess,yetitproceedsinpredictable m fashion. To resolvethisparadox,consideraneverydayanalogy. ? 4.2 LABORATORY MANUAL 137 Ba •The Skinorclothingthatcomesintocontactwiththe bariumshouldbe • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalab apron. • • • Objectives m 137 Determine decay. behavior ofradioactive Verify washed thoroughly withsoapandwater. , a 87 Ba Sr metastable depleted m m . the random ,a the half-lifeof sample maybewasheddownthesinkdrain. isotope ofbariumthat page. 50% to640cpm.Complete thetableonnext theratedrops rate of1280cpm. After 2.8hours, particular sampleof gamma decaywithahalf-lifeof2.8hours. A m m aeClass Date sample of counter ortimer gamma ray Materials detector 137 Ba 87 m Sr m has aninitialdecay • Chapter4 Section 4.4 Use with 29 30 1. Data andObservations 3. 2. 1. Procedure 3. 2. Name ie()02856841. 4016.8 14.0 11.2 8.4 5.6 2.8 0 Decay rate (cpm) Time (h) ie()03 09 1010102020300 240 210 180 150 120 90 60 30 0 Count rate(cpm) Counts Time (s) LAB multiplying themby2. Convert thebackground radiationreadingsin sample of safety goggles. and alabapron, Wear gloves, CAUTION: Table 1. intervals for5min.Record thedatain registered bythegammaraydetectorin30-s background activity by recordingthecounts as backgroundradiation.Measureandrecordthe tivity inanenvironment. This radiationisknown There isalways somelevel ofambientradioac- Switch theapparatuson. following thedirections given byyourteacher. Connect thedetector-counter apparatusby the next column. sample willbehave. Recordyourhypothesisin Hypothesize how theactivity ofthe Read over theentirelaboratoryactivity. the graph an example ofanexponential decaycurve. Label smooth linethroughthedatapoints. This curve is Plot agraphofdecayrateversus timeanddraw a Chemistry: Matter andChange 4.2 Figure A. 137 Ba Ask yourteachertobringa m to yourworkstation. 206030160 320 640 1280 • Catr4LaboratoryManual Chapter4 137 Data Ba Decay Rateof m Data Table 1 Data Table1 Hypothesis 4. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal radiation countraterecordedinstep2. becomes indistinguishablefromthebackground 30-s intervals in the numberofcountsregistered bythedetectorin has beenplacedinasatisfactory location.Record thesampleshouldnotbemoved onceit However, that thedetectorisregistering agoodsignal. provided location ofthesampleisnotcritical, Place thesampleneardetector. The precise Clean upyourwork area. Wash thedepletedsampledown thedrain. 87 Sr to acountrateincpmby aeClass Date m LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table2 until thecountrate

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. Name LAB corrected countrate. Subtract thebackgroundradiationrateobtainedinstep2fromeachcounttoobtain Convert thereadingsin Calculate theaverage backgroundcountrateincpm. mn ons(p)(p)(i)Cut cm (cpm) (cpm) Counts (min) (cpm) (cpm) Counts (min) iert cutrt iert countrate rate Time countrate rate Time 4.2 Data Table2 on orce on Corrected Count Count Corrected to acountrateincpmbymultiplyingthem2. Data Table 2 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter4 31 32 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB life of for halfthechosencountrate( the graphin ( plotted points.Labelthegraph b. a. estimated values in Measuring andUsingNumbers Measuring andUsingNumbers from Making andUsingGraphs Error Analysis r ) withintherangeofcorrectedcountratevalues in should have along or ashorthalf-life? Why? radioactive isotopesusedforthispurpose medically totracebloodflow. Doyouthinkthe Radioactive liquidsaresometimesused determination ofthehalf-life Based ontherangeofvalues in Over whatrangedidthebackgroundcountratefluctuate? Chemistry: Matter andChange Data Table2. 137 4.2 r Ba m Figure B by subtractingt( Data Table3. Choose suitablescalesforeachaxis.Draw asmoothcurve throughthe odtrietetm eae oti ae t( to determinethetimerelatedthisrate, t( r Plot agraphofcorrectedcountrateversus timeusingdata ) r r Figure B. ) fromt( /2). Recordallvalues in • Catr4LaboratoryManual Chapter4 Data Table3, 137 Calculate theaverage value ofthehalf-lifefromyour Calculate thehalf-lifeof Ba r m /2). Repeatthisprocedureforseveral values of . Data Table 3 estimate theuncertaintyinyour r 2t( /2 Data Table2. 2. Data Table3. long half-lives. Explainwhythisisaproblem. industry containradioactive nucleiwithvery Some waste fuelrodsfromthenuclearpower aeClass Date 137 Ba r ). Repeatthisprocess LABORATORY MANUAL m Use thiscountrateand . Chooseacountrate Estimate thehalf- r 2 t( /2) r . r /2) t( r )

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. E The PhotoelectricEffect aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Planck What isthevalueof Problem Name photoelectric effect. the rightshowsasetupformeasuring known asthephotoelectriceffect. Thediagramat is calledaphotoelectron,andthemechanism eject anelectronfromthemetal.Such piece ofmetal,itmay, ifthereissufficient energy, measured. through thefunnelisacurrentthatcanbe more energeticthesplashing.Theflowofwater pond. Themoreenergeticthehailstonesare, ejecting waterdropletsfromthesurfaceof activity, youwillmeasurethevalueofPlanck a valueof6.626 the photon the frequencyofphoton.Theconstantproportionality relating have particle-likequalitiesaswellwave-likequalities. concept oflightbeingtransmittedinwave always beenregardedasawave.Quantummechanicsintroducedthe twentieth-century science,thetheoryofquantummechanics.Lighthad photoelectric effect pavedthewayforoneofgreatestadvances pond high enoughtoenterthefunnel,wheretheyflowbackdown Above thepondisafunnel.Someofsplashesfromare way. Imagineapondbeingbombardedbyshowerofhailstones. waterfall isanalogoustoavoltagedrop. each secondisanalogoustoelectricalcurrent,andtheheightof over awaterfall.Thevolumeofwaterflowingpastpointintheriver the photoelectriceffect. The PhotoelectricEffect LAB Albert Einstein When aphotonoflighthitsthesurface The energyofaphotonisnowrecognizedasbeing proportionalto Consider thephotoelectriceffect inthisactivitythefollowing lectric current,whichistheflowofelectrons,inmanyways directly analogoustotheflowofwater. Thinkofariverflowing ’ s surface.Thehailstonesarelikephotons, ’ s constant? ’ s frequencyandenergyisknownasPlanck 5.1 ’ s 1905workonthe 10 LABORATORY MANUAL 34 J s, andisdenotedbytheletter • • Objectives Planck Determine effect. Observe ’ s constant. the photoelectric the valueof packets ’ s constantbyobserving , orphotons,that ’ s constant.Ithas plate Metal h aeClass Date . Inthis mercury arclamp power supply voltmeter ammeter phototube Materials and powersupply Liberated electrons supply Power V Radiant energy graph paper connecting wires set ofmercuryline (2 sheets) filters • Collector Chapter5 A Photocurrent Section 5.2 Use with 33 34 Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB and step6divide thedifference byfive. Note therangeinvoltage values betweenstep 5 Table 1 voltage andcurrentasthefirst entryin given range)ontheammeter. Recordthe the currentnearsmaximumvalue (forthe Reduce thevoltage ofthepower supplyuntil 404.7 nm. voltage asthelastentryin the ammetershows zerocurrent.Recordthis Adjust thevoltage ofthepower supplyuntil ammeter shouldregister acurrent. illuminates thephototubethroughfilter. The entrance. Positionthemercurylampsothatit Place the404.7-nmfilter over thephototube Set theammeteronleastsensitive scale. up for10minutesbeforetakingdata. Plug inthemercurylampandallow ittowarm on thepower. apparatus issetupcorrectlybeforeswitching equipment. Have yourteachercheckthatthe Referring to the next column. Planck’s constant.Recordyourhypothesisin energy arerelatedandmay be usedtocalculate hypothesis abouthow aphoton’s frequency and Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a light. Explain thequantummechanicalconceptof Explain whatismeantbyphotoelectriceffect. Define hitsametalplate. with sufficient energy, Describe whathappenswhenaphotonoflight, Chemistry: Matter andChange 5.1 photoelectron for 404.7nm. Figure A, . assemble thelaboratory Data Table1 • • • Use cautionwhenhandlingthemercury lamp.Mercury istoxic. Do nottouchthemercury lampasitmaybecomehot. Always wearsafetygogglesandanapron. • Catr5LaboratoryManual Chapter5 Data for Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 10. Figure A 2. 1. 9. 8. Clean upyourworkstation. Return alllabequipmentto itsproperplace. 690.7 nm. and 577.0nm, 546.1nm, 435.6nm, filters: Repeat steps4through9foreachoftheother Repeat step8threemoretimes. voltage andcurrentreadingsin calculated value from step7.Recordthenew Increase thevoltage ofthepower supplybythe aeClass Date apCollector Lamp LABORATORY MANUAL Electrons Voltmeter by manufacturer d supply Power

V distanceasrecommended Data Table1. A Ammeter

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations Name aeegh(m rqec H)Sopn otg V Energy (J) Stoppingvoltage(V) Frequency (Hz) Wavelength (nm) otg urn otg urn otg urn otg urn otg Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage LAB energy axisat The value oftheinterceptisvalue ofthebest-fit linewhereit crossesthevertical choosetwo points( calculate theslope, Find theslopeand preliminary sketch maybehelpfulforthis. reaches asufficiently negative value toallow thebest-fit linetointercept theenergy axis. A a best-fit straightlinethroughthedatapoints.Make surethattherangeofenergy axis Plot frequency (Hz)versus energy (J)ongraphpaperforthevalues in 1.6 e.Recallthat thecharge ofanelectronis stopping voltage bythecharge ofanelectron, Calculate theenergy correspondingtoeachfrequency in Calculate thefrequency ofeachwavelength oflightgiven in stopping voltage in the datapointsforeachfilter. Recordthevoltage atwhichthecurrentfalls tozeroasthe a final region wherethecurrentiszerowhatever thevoltage. Draw asmoothcurve through aninitialfalling ofcurrentwithincreasingvoltage and filter shoulddescribetwo regions, plotvoltage (V)versus current(A)onagraph. The dataforeach For eachofthefilters, best-fit lineandusethe following equation. hre theproducteVhasunitsofjoules. charge, V A V A V A V A V (A) (V) (A) (V) (A) (V) (A) (V) (A) (V) 690.7 nm 577.0 nm 546.1 nm 435.6 nm 404.7 nm 0. m456n 4. m570n 690.7nm 577.0nm 546.1nm 435.6nm 404.7 nm c / 10 5.1 that , 19 0000 0 coulombs. Becauseavolt isequivalent toajouleofenergy percoulombof c 3 y 0. Data Table2. -intercept ofthebest-fit lineonthefrequency versus energy graph. To 10 8 ms slope 1 andthatananometeris10 , ( E 1 2 , E 1 E ) and( Data Table 1 Data Table 2 1 )/( 2 2 , E 1 2 Data Table2 ) ) thatarewellseparatedon the Data Table2. aeClass Date 9 m. LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table2. by multiplyingeach Recall that Draw • Chapter5 35 36 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry hc r oeeegtc photonsofbluelightorredlight? Explain. Which aremoreenergetic, LAB possible sourcesoferrorfromtheexperiment. conclusion thatlighthasaparticle-like aspect. the sameiflamphadbeentwiceasbright.Explainwhythisobservation leadstothe constant thework function values: Thinking Critically Measuring andUsingNumbers accepted value of6.626 experimentally determinedvalue ofPlanck’s constantbelow andcompareittothe theslopehasunitsofJ or1/s, that onehertziscycle persecond, estimate ofPlanck’s constant( Measuring andUsingNumbers compare yourvalue for thework functiontothevalue given inthedocumentation. the work functionbelow. Ifthedocumentationforphototubeusedinlabisavailable, the energy requiredforanelectrontoescapethesurface ofthemetal.Recordyourvalue for for the Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 5.1 work function h whichisafundamentalconstantofnature. The graphwould lookprecisely , What was thepercenterrorinyourvalue ofPlanck’s constant?List The formofyoursecondgraphiscompletelydeterminedbytwo of themetalfromwhichemitterinphototubeismade.It 10 hc sapoet fteeitrmtra,andPlanck’s whichisapropertyoftheemittermaterial, , h 34 ,oneofthefundamentalconstantsnature.Recalling ), J • Catr5LaboratoryManual Chapter5 s. The slopecalculatedinstep5onpage35isan Multiply the y -intercept by aeClass Date 1. This isyourestimate LABORATORY MANUAL s. Recordyour

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Electron Charge toMassRatio aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name beam, whichismeasurable.Thus,if Eliminating voltage, field, andthemasschargeofelectrons. of thecircledependsonspeedelectrons,strengthmagnetic beam movesthroughthismagneticfield,itisforcedintoacircularpath.Theradius tube andproduceauniformmagneticfieldthroughoutthetube.Aselectron the ionrecombines),pathofelectronbeamcanbeseen. low-pressure gasthationizesuponcollisionwithanelectron(emittinglightwhen eye. However, whentheelectromagnetictubecontainsa called anelectrongun. speed andproduceanelectronbeam.Thissetupisoften can. Electronspassingthroughtheslitescapeathigh to it.Emittedfilamentelectronsacceleratetowardsthe small, can-shapedenclosurewithahighvoltageapplied As shownin the filamentinaprocessknownasthermionicemission. a hotfilament.Electronsareemittedfromthesurfaceof Thomson for thishewasawardedaNobelprizein1905.Inactivity, youwillfollowin radius Here, kisaconstantthat dependsontheparticularcoilsbeingused.For acoilof I coils isknown.Infact,themagneticfield e/m canbecalculated.Fortunately, themagneticfieldduetoapairofHelmholtz electron gun,whichisknown,and This iscalledthee/mratioequation.Onright handside, of strength Electron Charge toMassRatio , inamps,goingthroughthecoils. LAB The velocity, Large coils,knownasHelmholtzaremountedaroundtheelectromagnetic Normally anelectronbeamisinvisibletothehuman In anelectromagnetictube,electronsareproducedby The radiusofthecircularpathanelectronwithvelocity respectively. In1897,J.Thomsoncalculatedthee/mratioforanelectron,and he chargeandmassofanelectronareoftendenotedbytheletters R and V ’ s footstepsanddeterminethechargetomassratioofanelectron. , isgivenbythefollowingequation. B v 5.2 Figure A, N in thetwoequations,andsolvingfor(e/m)yields thefollowing. is givenbythefollowingequation. number ofturnsineach coil,kisgivenbythefollowingequation. v , ofanelectronwithmass, LABORATORY MANUAL the filamentissurroundedbya k (e/m) r 1/2 (9.0 B mv is theradiusofcircularpathelectron (the strengthofthemagneticfield)isknown, mv B 2 / r B 2 2 10 , inTeslas, isproportionaltothecurrent V k /( I B m B e e 7 , thathasbeenacceleratedbya 2 V v )( r N 2 ) / R ) aeClass Date V v is thevoltageof in amagneticfield supply Filament power Accelerating V e voltage and m , • Chapter5 Section 5.3 e e e Use with Figure A e e e e e e 37 38 3. 2. 1. Procedure 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions electron? ratio (e/mratio)ofan What isthechargetomass Problem Name LAB is shown in the electromagnetictube. The entirearrangement Assemble theHelmholtzcoils apparatusaround specific details.Donot switchtheapparatuson. ware beingused. Your teacherwill provide but detailsvary dependingontheparticularhard- Figure A Assemble theelectromagnetictubeapparatus. andrecordthevalue in duction, constant kusingtheequationgiven intheintro- coil. Record The numberofturns Record theradius( coils. Divide thediameterby2togetradius. Measure thediameterofoneHelmholtz If thecurrentthroughHelmholtzcoil( ( how willtheradiusofelectronbeam doubled, If thenumberofturnsinHelmholtzcoil( orremainunchanged? decrease, will theradiusofelectronbeamincrease, If thevoltage ( constant toanswerquestions2Ð4. ratio willbea tion andthefact thatthee/m ( electrontravel radius( constant (k), (e/m) intermsofthevoltage ( What istheequationforcharge tomassratio nrae erae orremainunchanged? decrease, increase, willtheradiusofelectronbeam is increased, r R ) change? ,andnumberofcoilturns( ), Chemistry: Matter andChange 5.2 provides asketch ofthegeneralsetup, Figure B. N V in ) oftheelectrongunisincreased, Data Table1. R ,i ees in inmeters, ), N Ask yourteachertoinspect should bewrittenonthe electron. • • charge Determine Objective V N Hot objectsmaynotappeartobehot. Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. ,current( ), Data Table1. )? Usethisequa- Calculate the • Catr5LaboratoryManual Chapter5 r Data Table1. ,coilradius ), e to mass the ratioof I I ) ), R ) is m for an 5. 4. the apparatuson. your experimental arrangementbeforeswitching tron beamradiusin andelec- Helmholtzcurrent, accelerating voltage, Refer toyourteacherforinformation. Recordthe electron beamvary dependingontheequipment. ment. Methodsforsettingtheradiusof circles. Choosearadiussuitableforyourequip- coils areoptimizedtoproducedifferent size of radius0.04m(4cm).Different Helmholtz coils suchthattheelectronbeamturnsinacircle be thesame. Adjust thecurrentinHelmholtz but theprinciple oftheprocedurewill given here, may usedifferent operatingvalues thanthose 70 volts. Somemodelsofelectromagnetictubes Set theacceleratingpotential( darken theroom. strong andsteady, several minutes. When theelectronbeam is teacher) andallow the filament towarm upfor recommended values (asprovided byyour Adjust thefilament currentandvoltage totheir aeClass Date connecting leads voltmeter ammeter Helmholtz coilsandpowersupply electromagnetic tubeandpowersupply Materials LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table2. V ) toabout Figure B

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 6. Name LAB Table 2, e/m Measuring andUsingNumbers from Measuring andUsingNumbers into Measuring andUsingNumbers accordingly. circle radiusfixed andadjustthecoilcurrent intervals upto100 V. Keep theelectronbeam Repeat step5foracceleratingvoltages at5-volt the values formagneticfield strength( the squareoffield strength( R Radius ofHelmholtzcoil(m) Accelerating voltage( Data Table3. Data Table2, 5.2 2 V calculate thecorresponding /( B 2 r VIr 2 ,calculate thee/mratiosneededtocomplete ), Using thevalues fortheradiusofelectronbeampath( the value forkfrom V urn nHlhlzcis()Radiusofelectron beampath(m) Current inHelmholtz coils(A) ) B 2 ) andenterthevalues in Using thevalues in Using thevalues forthecurrentinHelmholtzcoils( Enter theacceleratingvoltage values from r 2 B values andentertheminto ) andenterthemin N Data Table1, ubro un nci k Number ofturnsincoil Data Table 2 Data Table 1 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal and theequation Data Table3 Clean upyourworkstation. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Data Table3. Data Table3. aeClass Date Data Table3. LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table3. and theequation B Then calculate = k r I ) from Data Table2 calculate , Data I • ) Chapter5 39 40 6. 5. 4. Name Real-World Chemistry ceeaigvlaeMgei il Sur fmgei qaeo lcrne/mratio Square ofelectron Square ofmagnetic Magneticfield Accelerating voltage 1. LAB statistical 1.76 Thinking Critically in Measuring andUsingNumbers Error Analysis different timesandfrequenciestocreateaclear must strike different regions ofthescreenat struck withtheelectrons. The electronbeam with substancesthatglow different colorswhen the electrongunanddirectedatascreencoated and televisions. The electronsareejectedfrom areusedextensively invideomonitors short, orCRT for cathode ray. Cathoderaytubes, Another nameforabeamofelectronsis Data Table3. Chemistry: Matter andChange ( 5.2 V VBB 10 tegh(el)fieldstrength (Tesla strength (Tesla) ) 11 uncertainty associatedwithyouraverage value forthee/mratio. C/kg. Account forany differences betweenthetwo values. Note thattheunitsofe/mratioareCoulombsperkilogram(C/kg). Use thevariation inthe e/mratiovalues in Compare thee/mratiovalue youobtainedwiththeacceptedvalue of • Catr5LaboratoryManual Chapter5 Calculate theaverage value ofthee/mratiofromresults Data Table 3 2 2. beam ofelectrons? what forcedoyouthinkisusedtodeflectthe image. With theexperience gainedinthislab, displays? longer (deeper)thansmall-screen CRT the screen. Why are large-screen CRT displays precisely deflectedtoreach specific spotson centered behindthescreen. The beamis The electrongunusedinaCRT islocated 2 aeClass Date Data Table3 beampathradius (m ) LABORATORY MANUAL r 2 to estimatethe 2 (c/kg) )

LAB 6.1 LABORATORY MANUAL

Use with PropertiesProperties ofof thethe PeriodicPeriodic TableTable Section 6.3

he periodic table organizes a remarkable amount of information Tabout the chemical and physical properties of the elements. The information is organized in such a manner that trends in properties and important relationships can be readily identified. In this activity, you will identify several elements based on their properties and the properties of the surrounding elements in the periodic table.

Problem Objectives Materials What relationships and • Construct a simplified index cards (18) trends exist in the periodic version of the periodic outline of the table? table. periodic table • Identify trends and rela- showing chemical tionships among elements symbols only in the same group. • Identify trends and relationships among elements in the same period. • Draw conclusions about the predictability of chemical properties of the elements.

Pre-Lab Procedure

1. Which property—the atomic mass or atomic 1. For each unknown element listed in Data Table 1, number—uniquely identifies a chemical element? copy its chemical and physical properties onto Explain how the property uniquely identifies each separate index cards. Be sure to record the letter atom. of the unknown element on each index card. The 2. Describe the general characteristics of metals, following abbreviations are used in Data Table 1: nonmetals, and metalloids. IP ionization potential, BP boiling point, MP melting point. 3. Read over the entire laboratory activity. Develop a hypothesis about which properties are the most 2. Begin by grouping cards that have common useful for identifying the group to which an chemical properties. You should have eight unknown element belongs. Develop a hypothesis groups. about which properties are the most useful for 3. Within each group of cards, arrange the cards into determining the sequence of the elements within a column based on their physical properties. a group. Develop a hypothesis about which prop- 4. Arrange the groups from left to right, based on Copyright ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. erties are the most useful for identifying the trends in physical and chemical properties. period to which an element belongs. Record all of 5. Based on the arrangement of the cards from step your hypotheses on page 43. 4, record the letter of each index card in its corre- sponding location in Data Table 2.

Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 6 41 42 Name Unknown LAB lmn hsclpoete Chemicalproperties Physicalproperties element M O Q N H G D A K R C B E P F L J I Chemistry: Matter andChange 6.1 IP IP IP yellow solid;poorconductorofheatandelectricity; phere; IP liquid orsolidform;similarindensitytotheatmos- colorless diatomicgas;notattractedtomagnetinits IP IP solid form;densitysimilartothatoftheatmosphere; colorless gas;attractedtoamagnetinitsliquidand of theatmosphere;IP colorless monatomicgas;densitygreaterthanthat IP BP atmosphere; IP colorless monatomicgas;densitysimilartothatofthe IP colorless monatomicgas;densitylessthanatmosphere; IP form; notconductiveinitsveryhard,crystalline conducts electricityandheatinitsbrittle,black,solid heat; IP metallic finish;malleable;conductselectricity; metallic finish;malleable;IP BP metallic finish;malleable;IP MP greenish coloreddiatomicgas;IP MP atmosphere; IP colorless diatomicgas;densitylessthanthatofthe BP pale yellowdiatomicgas;IP IP 9.3 eV; MP 6.0 eV; MP 10.4 eV; MP 8.2 eV; MP 13.6 eV; MP 10.5 eV; MP 24.6 eV; BP 11.3 eV; MP 8.3 eV; MP 883 181 186 188 101 ° ° C 7.7 eV; MP C; BP ° ° ° C C 14.5 eV; MP C; BP 21.6 eV; BP 13.6 eV; MP 1278 660 1410 2079 1342 113 44 3652 272 218 • ° ° 35 C; BP C; BP Catr6LaboratoryManual Chapter6 ° ° ° ° ° C; BP C; BP C; BP C; BP 650 ° C ° 15.8 eV; MP ° ° C; MP C C C; BP ° 210 C; BP 17.4 eV; MP 5.1 eV; MP 5.4 eV; 2467 280 ° 2970 445 2355 2550 C; BP Data Table 1 249 259 ° C 183 269 ° ° 13.0 eV; C C 1090 ° ° ° ° C C; semiconductor C; semiconductor ° C; MP C; BP ° ° C C 189 ° C 196 98 ° C; ° ° C 220 C; 246 253 aeClass Date ° C; ° ° C C LABORATORY MANUAL forms trihalides readily formsionsinwater reacts quicklywiththeatmosphere, readily formsionsinwater reacts quicklywiththeatmosphere, monoxide whenburnedwithoxygen acid toformhydrogengas,formsa to formawhitepowder, reactswith burns brightlyinpresenceofoxygen forms tetrahalides,dioxides forms adihydrogencompound compound whenreactedwithiron, burst intoflame,formsanorange flame, causesglowingsteelwoolto causes glowingsplinttoburstinto drogen compound reacts withoxygen,formsadihy- forms trihalides oxygen forms amonoxidewhenreactedwith many different oxides causes glowingsplinttogoout,forms metals andallsemiconductors forms binarycompoundswithmost reacts violentlywithoxygen metals andallsemiconductors forms binarycompoundswithmost and dioxides,formstetrahalides reacts withoxygentoformmonoxides forms manydifferent oxides not reactive not reactive not reactive

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Hypothesis Name LAB periodic table? Thinking Critically identified inquestion2?Describepossiblereasons fortheseexceptions. Analyzing Information decrease? group? Which Analyzing Information Write adescriptionofthepropertiesusedtoclassifyelementsintoeachgroup. A2 A4 A6 A8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A 6.1 What otherelementpropertieswould behelpfulincreatinga Are thereany groupsthatareanexception tothe grouptrends Which propertiestendtoincreaseasyoumove down througha Data Table 2 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter6 43 Name Date Class

LAB 6.1 LABORATORY MANUAL

5. Drawing a Conclusion Summarize what you have learned about the organization of the periodic table. How accurate were your hypotheses?

6. Error Analysis Using an element identity key provided by your teacher, convert the unknown element letters (A through R) used in Data Table 2 to their actual chemical symbols. List your arrangement of the actual chemical identities in Data Table 3. Compare the arrangement of elements in Data Table 3 with an actual periodic table. How accurately does your periodic table match the actual periodic table? Complete Data Table 4.

Data Table 3 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

Data Table 4

Number of elements in correct group

Number of elements in incorrect group

Percentage of elements in correct groups (Divide the number of elements in correct group by 18 and multiply by 100.)

Number of elements in correct position

Number of elements in incorrect position

Percentage of elements in correct position (Divide the number of elements in correct position by 18 and multiply by 100.)

Real-World Chemistry

1. Using chemical separation processes can oxygen (O2), nitrogen (N2), and many other require significant amounts of energy. What gases. Can elemental oxygen be extracted from makes aluminum so ideal for recycling? the atmosphere using processes that rely on ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. 2. Oxygen is a vital element for many processes. physical properties only? Describe how the The space shuttle, for example, relies on differing boiling points of oxygen and nitrogen engines powered by liquid oxygen to reach an can be used to help separate the two gases. orbit around Earth. The atmosphere contains

44 Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 6 Laboratory Manual Name Date Class

LAB 6.2 LABORATORY MANUAL

Use with PeriodicPeriodic TrendsTrends inin thethe Section 6.3 PeriodicPeriodic TableTable

he periodic table organizes elements into related groups. Within these groups, Ttrends in common properties occur. These trends may be used to predict unknown property values for other elements in the same group. In this activity, you will predict properties of elements in the periodic table based on periodic trends.

Problem Materials How accurately can properties be predicted using 20 index cards, each with property informa- trend information in the periodic table? tion for one of the first 20 elements. The property information, at a minimum, Objectives should include melting point, ionization • Identify trends among elements in the same group energy, and electronegativity. • Draw conclusions about the accuracy of predicting Reference material with experimental values chemical properties using group trends. for melting point, ionization energy, and electronegativity for elements 31–36.

Pre-Lab 5. Use the best predictive method (1 or 2) for each 1. What periodic trends exist for ionization energy? property to predict the properties of elements 31Ð36 in groups 3AÐ7A. Record the predicted 2. What periodic trends exist for electronegativity? values in Data Table 4. 3. Read over the entire laboratory activity. Hypoth- 6. Using a suitable reference, such as your textbook, esize which method you expect to be the best in locate the known value for the indicated property confirming the known properties of Ca and K. The and record it in Data Table 4. worst? Hypothesize which method you expect to be the best in predicting the properties of elements Method 1: Using element row in the periodic 31Ð36. Record your hypothesis on page 46. table Complete the following steps using elements in the Procedure same group as potassium. The term property value refers to the melting point, ionization energy, or elec- 1. Arrange the index cards for the elements in each tronegativity of the element. Record your results in group in order of increasing period. Data Table 1. 2. Predict the properties of K and Ca using 1a. Scale the value of the property of the element in Method 1. Record your results in Data Table 1. row 3 of the periodic table by multiplying the 3. Predict the properties of K and Ca using value by 1.35. Method 2. Record your results in Data Table 2. 1b. Scale the value of the property of the element in 4. Using a suitable reference, such as your textbook, row 2 of the periodic table by multiplying the record the known values for K and Ca in Data value by 0.35. Copyright ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. Table 3. Also record the predicted values for K 1c. Predict the value of the property of the element and Ca from Data Table 1 and Data Table 2 in in row 4 by subtracting the scaled value of the Data Table 3. Compare the accuracy of Method 1 element in row 2 from the scaled value of the and Method 2 for predicting the properties of K element in row 3. (1c 1a 1b) (This is the and Ca. Identify the best method to use for predicted property value using the atomic mass predicting each property. proportions method.)

Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 6 45 46 Data andObservations 2b. 2a. Data Table2. tronegativity oftheelement.Recordyourresultsin orelec- ionizationenergy, refers tothemeltingpoint, same groupaspotassium. The term Complete thefollowing stepsusingelementsinthe Usingatomicnumberproportions Method 2: 1e. 1d. Name 2c. 1b. 2d. 2b. 2e. 2a. 1a. 2c. 1c. LAB period 3fromtheelementin4. Subtract theatomicnumberofelementin period 2fromtheelementin3 Subtract thepropertyvalue oftheelementin period 2fromtheelementin3. Subtract theatomicnumberofelementin the samegroupascalcium. Repeat steps1athrough1fusingelementsin andelectronegativity. tion energy, ioniza- predicted values forthemeltingpoint, Repeat steps1athrough1euntilyouhave predicted propertyvalue (value atomic number property value atomic number property value predicted propertyvalue property value property value value Chemistry: Matter andChange atomic number property value atomic number 6.2 period 3element step 2b value period 3element step 1a period 2element period 3element period 4element period 3element period 2element period 3element period 2element step 2c value property value )/value step 2d property 0.35 1.35 property value step 2a • Catr6LaboratoryManual Chapter6 Data Table 2(Method2) Data Table 1(Method1) step 1b etn oiain lcr-MligInzto Electro- Melting Ionization Electro- Melting Ionization Electro- Melting Ionization Electro- Melting Ionization on nryngtvt on nrynegativity energy point negativity energy point negativity energy point negativity energy point Hypothesis 2g. 2e. 2d. 2f. oasu K Calcium(Ca) Potassium (K) Calcium(Ca) Potassium (K) the samegroupascalcium. Repeat steps2athrough2fusingelementsin andelectronegativity. tion energy, ioniza- predicted values forthemeltingpoint, Repeat steps2athrough2euntilyouhave number method.) predicted propertyvalue usingtheatomic value oftheelementinperiod3.(Thisis Add thevalue derived instep2dtotheproperty in step2canddivide bythevalue instep2a. Multiply thevalue foundinstep2bbythevalue aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name Best method Known value Method 2value Method 1value ubrPoet etmto sdCluae au Knownvalue Calculatedvalue Bestmethodused Property number LAB Atomic 3Ionizationenergy 33 Ionizationenergy 32 Ionizationenergy 31 6Ionizationenergy 36 Ionizationenergy 35 Ionizationenergy 34 6.2 Data Table 4:Predicting Property Values forPeriod4Group 3A–7AElements Melting point Electronegativity Melting point Electronegativity Melting point Electronegativity Melting point Electronegativity Melting point Electronegativity Melting point Electronegativity Data Table 3:IdentifyingtheBestMethodforEachProperty etn on °)Inzto nry(clml Electronegativity Ionizationenergy (kcal/mol) Melting point(°C) KCa KCa KCa aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter6 47 Name Date Class

LAB 6.2 LABORATORY MANUAL

Analyze and Conclude

1. Comparing and Contrasting Which method is best for predicting melting point for groups 1 and 2?

2. Comparing and Contrasting Which method appears to be best for predicting ionization potential for groups 1 and 2?

3. Comparing and Contrasting Which method appears to be best for predicting electronegativity for groups 1 and 2?

4. Thinking Critically What may be the cause of the inaccuracies observed?

5. Thinking Critically After completing the predictions for elements 31 through 36, which method do you believe is better over multiple groups? Explain.

6. Thinking Critically Do you think simple models can be used to accurately predict unknown element properties?

7. Error Analysis In the Pre-Lab hypothesis, did you select the best method for predicting the properties of Ca and K? Did you select the best method for predicting the properties of elements 31 to 36? Did a single method work best for all cases?

Real-World Chemistry

1. In 1960, there were 102 known elements in the 2. What unique property of elements 103 and periodic table. Since 1960, a significant amount greater would be most useful in placing them in ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. of nuclear research has been done. As of 1997, the correct position in the periodic table? there were 112 elements in the periodic table. What do you suspect caused the increase in the number of elements?

48 Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 6 Laboratory Manual Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. P Is there potassiumincoffee? aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 7 Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions test? confirmed withachemical potassium incoffee be Can thepresenceof Problem Name decolorized withcharcoal,anallotropicformofsolidcarbon. it easiertodetecttheyellowcolor, thecoffee solutionwillbe when potassiumionsreactwithsodiumhexanitrocobaltate.To make potassium incoffee bythecharacteristicyellowcolorthatappears qualitative analysis.Inthisactivity, youwilldetectthe presenceof determining theamountofsubstancepresent,processiscalled fireworks alsocontainpotassiumcompounds. compounds areusedinphotographyandmedicine.Matches with compoundscontainingnitrogenandphosphorus.Potassium compounds areoneofthethreemainingredientsinfertilizers,along essential forthegrowthandmaintenanceoforganisms.Potassium such askerosene,whichdoesnotreactwithpotassium.Potassiumis both oxygenandwatervapor, potassiumisstoredunderanoilyliquid with water, producingtheflammablegasoxygen.Becauseaircontains Is there potassiumincoffee? LAB When atestconfirmsthepresenceofsubstancewithout table, analkalimetal.Potassiumreactseasilywithoxygenand otassium isachemicallyactiveelementinGroup1oftheperiodic 7.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Openflames might ignitehairorloose clothing. • Sodiumhexanitrocobaltate isanirritant,slightlytoxic, andapossible • Potassiumnitrateshould not comeintocontactwithskin. • Nitricacidistoxicandcorrosive toskin. • Broken glassware caneasilypuncture skin. • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • potassium incoffee. Detect Objective sensitizer. the presenceof aeClass Date test tubes(4) 10-mL graduated 250-mL beaker nitric acid(HNO dry charcoal decolorizing coffee Materials potassium nitrate sodium hexanitro- cylinder charcoal (KNO (Na cobaltate 3 CO 3 ) 3 (NO 2 ) 6 3 ) ) stirring rods(3) striker ormatches filter paper weighing paper labels orgrease test-tube clamp test-tube rack solid stoppertofit balance Bunsen burner funnel pencil test tube Section 7.3 Use with 49 50 Data andObservations Procedure Pre-Lab Name 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. ettb ubrIiilclrColorafter5min Initialcolor Test-tube number LAB the flamewhilegentlyshakingcontents. continuously move thetesttubeinandoutof ing process. point thetesttubeatanyone duringtheheat- gently warm thefiltrate. lightthe Bunsen burner and Using astriker, Fill a250-mLbeaker halffullwithcoolwater. record thefinal colorin filter thefiltrate againand orless orpaleyellow, If thecollectedfiltrate intesttube1isnotcol- pour thecoffee-charcoal mixtureintothefilter. placethedrycharcoalintofilter and tube 1, ter. With thestemoffunnelinsertedintest Use thefilter paperandfunneltoconstructafil- about 6mLofdrycharcoal. Use adry10-mLgraduatedcylinder tomeasure shake itscontentsfor2min. the coffee. Putastopper inthetesttubeand tube andadd0.2gofdecolorizingcharcoalto Place about8mLofcoffee intheunlabeledtest Label threetesttubes column. potassium. Recordyourhypothesisinthenext hypothesis aboutwhycoffee islikely tocontain Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a taining distilledwater? What isthesignificance ofthetesttubecon- Describe thefunctionofcarboninthisactivity. State threeusesofpotassium. test tubesinatest-tuberack. hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr7LaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 7 7.1 3 2 1 Using atest-tubeclamp, 1 , Data Table1. 2 ATO:Donot CAUTION: and , 3 . Placeallfour Data Table 1 14. 13. 12. 11. 10. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 9. 8. 4. 3. 2. 1. changes observed ineachtesttube. Note andrecordin Let thesolutionsstandfor5minutes. Mix eachsolutionwithacleanstirringrod. solutions in hexanitrocobaltate. Recordthecolorofthese or 6dropsofnitricacidand1mLsodium add5 To eachofthethreelabeledtesttubes, about 2mLdistilledwater intotesttube3. test tube2.Cleanthecylinder andmeasure measure about2mLofpotassiumnitrateinto Clean anddrythegraduatedcylinder. Useitto test tubeinthebeaker containingcoolwater. Cool thecontentsoftesttubebyplacing 2 mLleftinthetesttube. Slowly boilthesolutionuntilthereisabout Wash yourhandsbeforeleaving thelab. Clean upyourworkstation. Return allequipmenttoitsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofallchemicalsasinstructedbyyour aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table1. Data Table1 any color

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 7 Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name LAB would theflamecolorbeyellow? Explain. Predicting the presenceofpotassium? Predicting Predicting contains potassium. Observing andInferring Observing andInferring 7.1 What additionaltestmightbedonetoconfirm thatthecolorchangeisdueto was tested? otherthan coffee, What resultsmightyouexpect ifaplantmaterial, If asampleofpotassiumcompoundwas heatedinaBunsenburner flame, What colorchangesdidyouobserve after5minutes? Cite theexperimental evidence usedtoestablishthatcoffee aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 51 52 7. 6. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB and didnotaddpotassiumtothesolution. Thinking Critically Error Analysis have suchdiverse uses. baking powder. Explainhow potassiumcan isawhitesolidfoundin as creamoftartar, commonlyknown potassium hydrogentartrate, and permanganate isusedasagermicide, potassium Potassium chromateisacarcinogen, hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr7LaboratoryManual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 7 7.1 What aresomepossiblesourcesoferrorinthisactivity? Suggest amethodtoshow thatthecharcoaldecolorizedcoffee 2. are prescribed. pressure. Explainwhypotassiumsupplements thusreducingblood retained fluidsinthebody, increased urinationandreducethevolume of prescribed withdiuretics.Diureticscause blood pressure). These supplements areoften written forpeoplewithhypertension(high prescriptions forpotassiumsupplementsare about30million Each yearintheUnitedStates, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. I The PeriodicPuzzle aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 7 Laboratory Manual 2. 1. elements omitted. book. observations basedondatafromthedamagednote- The professorprovided youwithalistofnotesand Procedure best strategy forsolving thepuzzle. Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Decideuponthe Pre-Lab characteristics? table basedontheir elements inaperiodic How canyouplace Problem Name label (from the containers,whichassistantoftenreferencedinnotes. What didsurvive,however, weretheetchedserialnumbersoneachof the elements’usesandtraits,datacollectedbyotherstudents. was damagedaswell.Thisnotebookcontainedpracticalfactsabout matters, muchoftheinformationcontainedinassistant’s notebook burned beyondrecognitionduringtheincident.To furthercomplicate storing examplespecimensofeachelementinidenticalcontainers. The accidentoccurredwhilehewasintheprocessoflabelingand suffered anaccidentwhilefailingtoobservepropersafetyprocedures. first taskistofinishaprojectstartedbytheformerassistant,who skills, canyoudeterminetheidentitiesof36elements? preliminary observations.Usingthisdataandyourdeductivereasoning combined theremaininginformationwithsomeoftheirown The PeriodicPuzzle magine thefollowingscenario.You arethenewlabassistantfora professor inahighlyunderbudgetedchemistrydepartment.Your tainer was opened. metals. Element Element LAB The professorandsomeofthestudentshaveassignedanalphabetic Unfortunately, thelabelson36containerswereeitherdamagedor Figure A ff c a 7.2 has thehighestmeltingpoint ofthe started toturnwhitewhen its con- to is aperiodictablewiththeunknown jj ) toeachofthemysteryelements,andthey’ve LABORATORY MANUAL and relationships. ing ofperiodicproperties by usingyourunderstand- Identify Objective various elements 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. p, u If apatientdrinkscompound ofelements Element would have decayedlongbeforeitsarrival. becausetheunstableelement not achemist, thepersonwhoorderedelement Clearly, previous functions. metals areusedinitsplacetoperform quite poisonousifingested. That iswhyother As usefulaselement Compounds ofelement with anextremely unpleasant odor. elements afterelement The assistantswerereluctanttoburn someofthe can befoundin“hardwater.” doctors canview thepatient’s digestive tract. aeClass Date a computerwith Materials Internet access tothe j is usedtomake permanent magnets. h e a e itcanalsobe can be, y produced avioletvapor combined withelement Section 7.3 Use with q was u and 53 54 Name LAB Chemistry: Matter andChange 7.2

Helium 2 He 4.0026

Oxygen Neon 8 10 O Ne 15.999 20.180

Aluminum Silicon Argon 13 14 18

• Al Si Ar Catr7LaboratoryManual Chapter7 26.982 28.086 39.948

Scandium Vanadium Manganese Iron Cobalt Gallium Germanium Bromine Krypton 21 23 25 26 27 31 32 35 36 Sc V Mn Fe Co Ga Ge Br Kr 44.956 50.942 54.938 55.845 58.933 69.723 72.61 79.904 83.80

Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Cadmium Indium Antimony Tellurium Xenon 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 48 49 51 52 54 Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Cd In Sb Te Xe 85.468 87.62 88.906 91.224 92.906 95.94 (97.907) 101.07 102.91 112.41 114.82 121.76 127.60 131.29

Cesium Lutetium Hafnium Rhenium Osmium Iridium Thallium Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon 55 71 72 75 76 77 81 83 84 85 86 Cs Lu Hf Re Os Ir Tl Bi Po At Rn 132.905 174.97 178.49 186.21 190.23 192.22 204.38 208.98 (208.98) (209.99) Class (222.02) Date

Lawrencium Rutherfordium Dubnium Seaborgium Bohrium Hassium Meitnerium Ununnilium Unununium Unumbium Ununquadium Ununhexium Ununodium

103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116 118 LABORATORY MANUAL Lr Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Uun Uuu Uub Uug Uuh Uuo (262.11) (263.11) (262.11) (266.12) (264.12) (269.13) (268.14) (272.15) (272.15) (277) (289) (289) (293)

Lanthanum Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb 138.91 140.115 140.908 144.24 144.913 150.36 151.965 157.25 158.925 162.50 164.930 167.26 168.934 173.04

Actinium Thorium Protactinium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium 89 90 91 93 94 95 96 97 99 100 101 102 Ac Th Pa Np Pu Am Cm Bk Es Fm Md No (227.03) 232.04 231.04 (237.05) (244.06) (243.06) (247.07) (247.07) (252.08) (257.10) (258.10) (259.101)

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations 20. 19. 18. 17. 16. 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. 10. Name 9. bhh bb v p j d zff t n bh cii cc ee w y q s k m e g a iouaaggci djj dd x r l f LAB soils. Itisalsoessentialinthehumandiet. nutrient forplantgrowth andisfoundinmost compound withelement ment canbequitepoisonouswheninhaled. not destroyed intheaccidentbecausethisele- Element Element element Of theknown metals, Element Element of element Most solarcellsrelyuponthenaturalproperties thecontainerholdingelement Thankfully, ment The commonnamesfortheallotropesofele- in theperiodictable. to beidenticaltheelementdirectlyabove it element In theearly1800s, are radioactive. This isprobablybecausealltheisotopesof the personimmediatelythinksofnuclearpower. whensomeonethinksofelement Most often, among otherthings. Element Element than thatofelement It hasanatomicnumberthatissixtimesgreater merged insomesortofoil. 7.2 v are basedupontheircolors. f t b k gg z is asignificant partofstainlesssteel. is thelightestelement. is mostcommonlyfoundaspartofa is asilvery metalthatwas sub- is synthetic. bb. plays akey roleinphotography, x. l. w had beenthought d is anessential Table 1:TheMysteryElements l a was a, 28. 27. 26. 25. 24. 23. 22. 21. 31. 30. 29. organic compounds. more widelyknown. Element but theallotropesofelement erties, and other metalsinelement conditions. ithadoncebeenusedtotreatmedical sonous, Although every compoundofelement Elements x rayspasseasily. Element Element inalloys. other chemicallyorphysically, change whenthey arecombinedwitheach but theirmagneticproperties ferromagnetic, Neither element element canbesubstitutedfor most reactive nonmetal, It hasbeenhypothesizedthatelement Element Element cans. Element matic effect onelement Hydrochloric acidhadaconsiderablymoredra- Element aeClass Date j. LABORATORY MANUAL t x n i ee m hh g in organic compounds. sasiy silver liquid. is ashiny, is alightweightmetalthroughwhich is theheaviest alkaline-earthmetal. was usedtoplatesteelmake is themostmalleablemetal. and sasiy reddishmetal. is ashiny, aa gg share similarphysicalprop- nor element jj jj sgop elements ’s group, than itdidonthe • aa Chapter7 ii is foundin are aa dd, o are much is poi- the s 55 56 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB otueu o ovn h uze fs,wihwbst,andwhy? whichwebsite, most usefulforsolvingthepuzzle?Ifso, Using theInternet place inreallife? Thinking Critically identify? How didyouidentifyit? Acquiring and Analyzing Information number foreachsubstance? key? What isthe benefit ofhaving aunique if yousearchedtheInternetwiththisunique 7440-37-1. What would youexpect tohappen the elementargon (Ar)hasakey numberof given auniquenumberorkey. For example, Each registered substance inthedatabaseis created fromjustover 100different elements? many different substancesandmoleculesbe 23 millionregistered substances. How canso Chemical Abstracts Servicereportsmorethan for molecules. The database ofsubstancesat but also are maintainednotonlyforelements, chemistry. Databases ofchemicalinformation The computerhasaddedanew dimensionto Chemistry: Matter andChange 7.2 What aresomeofthereasonsthatthisscenarioisunlikely totake Was thereaparticularwebsiteortypeofthatyoufound • Catr7LaboratoryManual Chapter7 Which elementwas themostdifficult to 3. noble gas. a primary healthriskassociatedwithargon, find the Using aninternetsearchengine, and methodstocorrectlyhandlethesubstance. Data Sheets(MSDS)todescribetheirhazards Many substancesmusthave MaterialSafety aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Properties ofIonicCompounds aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions pounds? properties ofioniccom- What aresomeofthe Problem Name will exploresomeofthecommonpropertiesioniccompounds. other typesofcompounds?Byinvestigatingsodiumchloride,you found insideyou.Howcanyoudistinguishioniccompoundsfrom not livewithoutsodiumchlorideandotherioniccompounds human bodyiscomposedofnonioniccompounds.But,youcould W Properties ofIonicCompounds Define andgive anexample ofanelectrolyte. page 58. ductor ofelectricity. Recordyourhypothesis on hypothesis astowhetherdistilledwater isacon- Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a conductor ofelectricity. Describe whatisnecessaryforasubstancetobe stance tomelt. Explain whatforcesmustbeovercome forasub- Define crystallatticeenergy. LAB hat partsofyourbodyareioniccompounds?Thosethat compose yourskin?Your hair?Actually, mostofthe 8.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Donottouchbothelectrodes ontheconductivityindicatoratsame • Donottouchortasteanychemicalsusedformedinthelaboratory. • Hotobjectswillnotappeartobehot.Becareful when • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives forms. compounds indifferent the conductivityofionic Explain nonionic compound. ionic compoundswitha Compare andcontrast of NaCl. Observe time—a smallelectricaljoltcouldresult. handling anymaterialthathasbeenheated. the differences in the crystalshape 2. 1. CrystalLatticeStructure Part A: Procedure and recordyourobservations. it breaks.Notetheshapesofbroken pieces gentlytaponacoarsegrainuntil With ahammer, observations inthedatatable. to observe bothcoarse and fine salt.Recordyour orahandlens amicroscope, Use astereoscope, aeClass Date Bunsen burner crucible stereoscope, micro- hammer sugar (sucrose) LiCl NaCl, finegrain NaCl, coarsegrain Materials lens scope, orhand distilled water clay triangle crucible 100-mL beaker conductivity wire gauze ring standand indicator clamp • Chapter8 Section 8.2 Use with 57 58 Solution Figure A MeltingPoint Part B: Name Solid Conductivity Part C: 4. 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 1. LAB distilled water. Dissolvinginwater is another Transfer anddissolve thepileofNaClinto table. the distilledwater. Recordtheresultsin thedata placetheconductivity indicatorin tact wires, Making surethatyouhave wipedoff the con- NaCldissolves easilyinwater. stances, 100-mL beaker. Noticethatlike mostionicsub- Pour about50mLofdistilledwater intoaclean the results. of theconductivity indicatorinthepile.Record about thesizeofthreepeas.Placecontacts make asmallpileofNaCl, On apieceofpaper, shown in andusingthesameapparatus In thefumehood, point ashigh. recordthemelting not meltwithin2minutes, record themeltingpointaslow. Ifthesaltdoes If thesaltmeltswithin2-minuteperiod, whichever comesfirst. orfor2minutes, melts, and heatitwithalow flameuntiltheNaCl Sprinkle apea-sizedpileofNaClinthecrucible Set uptheapparatusasshown in the samesettingasyourburner instep2. sugarisnonionic.)Make sure theflameis isms, Like mostcompoundsin living organ- (Note: Chemistry: Matter andChange 8.1 Figure A, Ring stand repeat step2forsugar. Clay triangle Bunsen burner Ring clamp Crucible • Catr8LaboratoryManual Chapter8 Figure A . Molten Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 12. 11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. several minutes. the crucibleuntilLiClmelts. This maytake Place thecrucibleinclaytriangleandheat tor inthesolidLiCl.Recordresults. placetheconductivity indica- Before heatingit, classroom laboratoryequipment.) istoohightoobserve using NaCl, chloride, ionic compound.(Themeltingpointofsodium anothertypical LiCl, 1 goflithiumchloride, massoutapproximately drycrucible, In aclean, Set uptheapparatusasshown in but many donot.) water, Somenonioniccompoundsdissolve in (Note: Repeat step3withanequalamountofsugar. ignated containers. proper placeanddisposeof allwaste inthedes- Carefully returnalllaboratory equipmenttothe cooled beforeputtingthemaway. Be carefulthatyourburner andclampare dition asyoufoundit. Make sureyourbalanceisleftinthesamecon- of theLiCl. Follow yourteacher’s directionsfordisposing after ithascooledfor about10minutes. DoNOT touchthecrucibleuntil CAUTION: tact wires. andthencarefullycleanthecon- wires tocool, allow the Remove theconductivity indicator, the moltenLiCl.Recordyourobservations. contact wiresoftheconductivity indicatorinto Quickly turnoff theburner andplungetheclean tion. Recordtheresults. Place theconductivity indicatorinthesaltsolu- property shown bymany ioniccompounds. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Figure A.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Conductivity Part C: MeltingPoint Part B: Lattice Crystal Part A: Data andObservations Name after breakingthecoarsesalt Observations aboutthepiecesofNaCl fine NaCl Observations aboutthecoarseand Molten LiCl Solid LiCl Sugar dissolvedindistilledwater NaCl dissolvedindistilledwater Distilled water Solid NaCl sugar (highorlowmeltingpoint) Observations aboutthemeltingof of NaCl(highorlowmeltingpoint) Observations aboutthemeltingpoint etSbtne(eodlgta f,dl,bih,o lnig go,po,ornone) poor, (good, orblinking) bright, dull, (Record light as off, Test Substance LAB conductivity measure? whywas itimportant tousedistilledwater insteadoftapwater for the In Part C, in theirmeltingpoints? how dothesetwo typesofcompoundscompare a typicalnonioniccompound.Ingeneral, whilesugarrepresents Sodium chlorideandlithiumaretypicalionic compounds, andusingwords like From theresultsofPart A, pliable how would youdescribesodiumchloride? , 8.1 odciiyIdctr ConductorRating Conductivity Indicator soft , ductile , aeClass Date malleable LABORATORY MANUAL , brittle , hard ,or • Chapter8 59 60 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB investigation? do notexist intheotherstatesatroomtemperature? what isthatstateandwhydoyouthinkthey From whatyoulearnedinthisinvestigation, Drawing aConclusion water. canconductelectricitywhenthey areinthemoltenstateordissolved in the solidform, Thinking Critically attractive energy between particlescompareswiththeenergy ofthecrystallattice? how do youthinkthe Part Baboutthemeltingpointsofionicversus nonioniccompounds, nonionic compoundsexperience forcesbetweenparticles.Basedonwhatyoulearnedin whichareaffected byotherparticles.Inwords, tures but ratherasindividual particles, Comparing andContrasting points and(b)donotconductelectricityinthesolidstate. how thischaracteristicexplains whyioniccompoundsgenerally(a)have highmelting whicharerigidlyheldinplacebyelectrostaticattraction.Discuss tightly bytheions, Recognizing CauseandEffect Error Analysis is sometimesusedasathermal insulatorin anioniccompound, Magnesium carbonate, good conductorsofelectricity? and proteins. Why thenarepeoplesuch lipids, carbohydrates, suchaswater, ionic compounds, The humanbodyismainlycomposedofnon- Chemistry: Matter andChange 8.1 What couldbedonetoimprove theprecisionandaccuracy ofyour xli o oi opud,whichdonotconductelectricityin Explain how ioniccompounds, All ioniccompoundsexist inonlyonestateatroomtemperature. Nonionic compoundsdonotexist incrystallatticestruc- • Catr8LaboratoryManual Chapter8 nacytlltiesrcue theelectronsareheld In acrystallatticestructure, 3. pounds tobegoodthermalinsulators? buildings. Why would youexpect ioniccom- is notmadefromioniccompounds. explain whycookware ties ofioniccompounds, points thanmetals.Usingat leasttwo proper- Ionic compoundsoftenhave highermelting aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. P Formation ofaSalt Formation aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions How canweformasalt? Problem Name If weevaporatethewater, thenallthatshouldremainisthesalt,NaCl. following equation: stomach, producessalt,carbondioxide,andwater, accordingtothe is bakingsoda,withhydrochloricacid(HCl),thefoundinyour difference inproperties.Reactingsodiumhydrogencarbonate,which sodium andchlorine.Thegainorlossofelectronscanmakeabig Formation ofaSalt Formation and Cl Draw theLewis electron-dotdiagramsforNa resemble intheirelectronconfigurations. Identify thenoblegasesthatNa Na Na, following: Write theelectronconfiguration foreachofthe Define ionicbond. LAB lease passthesodiumchloride!Itisamazingthatfoodseasoned with anioniccompoundthatiscomposedoftwodeadlyelements . 8.2 NaHCO 3 (cr) l andCl Cl, , LABORATORY MANUAL HCl(aq) • •6 Donottouchortasteanychemicalsusedformedinthe • Hotobjectswillnotappeartobehot.Becareful whenhandlingthe • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • Objectives • dot diagramsforNa Draw NaHCO Observe Cl pound suchasNaCl. identify anioniccom- Give examples laboratory. cooling beaker. and eyes. M . and Cl 0 . HCl istoxicbyingestionorinhalationandcorrosive totheskin the Lewiselectron- NaCl(cr) 3 with HCl. the reactionof of howto CO 2 (g) 3. 2. 1. Procedure and necessary todissolve thepowder completely. sodium hydrogencarbonate. Add morewater if and swirlthesolutiongentlytodissolve the Add about15mLofdistilledwater tothebeaker (NaHCO Place 0.50gofsodiumhydrogencarbonate dry100-mLbeaker. Mass aclean, H 2 aeClass Date O(l) NaHCO 6 Materials phenol red dropper 10-mL graduated 100-mL beaker M indicator cylinder 3 HCl ) intothebeaker. 3 — balance microscope orhand wire gauze ring clamp ring stand Bunsen burner distilled water lens • Chapter8 Section 8.2 Use with 61 62 2. 1. Data andObservations Figure A 6. 5. 4. Name aso h mt ekr g Mass ofthebeaker Mass oftheNaHCO Mass ofthebeaker Mass oftheemptybeaker aso h al g Mass oftheNaCl LAB What gaswas releasedduring thechemicalreaction? whatdidyouobserve? As youaddedthehydrochloricacid, of thebeaker toevaporate therestofwater. shutoff theflameandallow theheat the beaker, beaker. solution toomuchoritwillspatteroutofthe rate thewater. Gently heatthecontentsofbeaker toevapo- Set uptheapparatusasshown in of thesolutionchangestoadefinite yellow. hydrochloric acidbysingledropsuntilthecolor addthe While gentlyswirlingthebeaker, solution better. paper underthebeaker toview thecolorof tion shouldberedincolor. Placeapieceofwhite Add 2Ð3dropsofphenolredindicator. The solu- Chemistry: Matter andChange 8.2 When onlyabout5mLofwater isleftin ATO:Donotheatthe CAUTION: Ring stand 3 NaCl g NaHCO 3 Bunsen burner Ring clamp Wire gauze Beaker Figure A. • Catr8LaboratoryManual Chapter8 g g Cleanup andDisposal 10. 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. 4. dition asyoufoundit. Make sureyourbalanceisleftinthesamecon- the sink. Rinse outthecontentsofyourcooledbeakers in Place unusedchemicalsinthewaste can. Record yourdatainthetable. shape ofsodiumchloride. see ifthepowder hasthecharacteristiccubic the contentsunderamicroscopeorhandlensto Examine thecontentsofbeaker. Examine Mass thecooledbeaker withthewhitepowder. before itisready tobehandled. Thebeaker willappearcool CAUTION: Allow thebeaker tocoolforatleast5minutes. cooled beforeputtingthemaway. Be carefulthatyourburner andclampare aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB of theproductwas different fromthemassoforiginalsodiumhydrogen carbonate. Drawing aConclusion less oralittlemorehydrochloricacidtothereaction?Explainyourdecision. would youneedtoaddalittle chloride andnotmixed withsodiumhydrogencarbonate, Recognizing CauseandEffect reactant? Thinking Critically Describe theresultingwhitepowder inthecooledbeaker. have ofthischange? The sodiumhydrogencarbonateunderwentachemicalchange. What evidence doyou Error Analysis eut ntelt 90 n 90,many in thelate1960sand1970s, result, is aneffective toothdecaypreventative. As a Studies have proven conclusively thatfluoride contains excess acid. how thischemicalcouldrelieve astomachthat explain tion fromtheequationforreaction, ingredient inantacidremedies.Usinginforma- Sodium hydrogencarbonateisacommon 8.2 ATO:Remembernever totasteanything inthelaboratory. CAUTION: What mighthave affected theaccuracy ofthisinvestigation? How canyouidentifytheproductasbeingdifferent fromthe nwn htti a hmclrato,explain whythemass Knowing thatthiswas achemicalreaction, To make surethatthewhitepowder was allsodium would beyourresponsetothisargument? fluorine was known tobeadeadlygas. What supply. Oneofthecommonarguments was that with thewater arose againstthis“tampering” strongopposition water supplies.However, trace quantitiesoffluoridetotheirdrinking communities intheUnitedStatesbegan adding aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter8 63

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Covalent BondinginMedicines aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name the samewayasaspirin.ThechemicalformulaforibuprofenisC for theactivationofpainsensorsinbody. Ibuprofenactsinmuch starch. Aspirininhibitstheproductionofanenzymethatisresponsible combining about0.3gramsofaspirinwithabindingagentsuchas and ananti-inflammatoryagent.Aspirintabletsaremanufacturedby used drug,actsapainreliever(analgesic),feverreducer(antipyretic), pair ofdots( shown withsticks,whiledoublebondsare withtwosprings.A bored atanglesthatapproximatetheacceptedbondangles. according tothenumberofcovalentbondstheywillform.Theholesare balls areusedtorepresentatoms.Thesehaveholesdrilledinthem drawings ofstructureshelpful.Inmodels,coloredwoodenorplastic and ibuprofenaresimilartothosefoundinmethanecarbondioxide. double covalentbonds.Thebondsinaspirin,acetaminophen, bonded. Electronsaresharedbetweenatomsinaseriesofsingleand drawn structure.Adoublebondisshownastwo pairofdots( aspirin isC Acetaminophen isnotananti-inflammatory. Thechemical formulafor Acetaminophen alsoactsasapainrelieverandfeverreducer. dashes ( A Covalent BondinginMedicines LAB Sticks andspringsareusedtorepresentbonds. Single bondsare Element representationsare: To studycovalentmolecules,chemistsfindtheuseof modelsand The atomsinthemoleculesofthesepainrelieversarecovalently spirin, acetaminophen,andibuprofenareallcommonlysold nonprescription painreliefmedicines.Aspirin,themostwidely 9 ). H 9.1 : 8 ) oradash( O 4 . AcetaminophenhastheformulaC LABORATORY MANUAL peeClrElement Sphere Color — ) isusedtorepresentasinglebondin elwHydrogen Yellow lc Carbon Black leNitrogen Blue e Oxygen Red 8 H 9 NO aeClass Date 2 . :: ) ortwo 13 H 18 O 2 . • Chapter9 Section 9.4 Use with 65 66 4. 3. 2. 1. Part A Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions drawn structures? sented bymodelsand and ibuprofenberepre- aspirin, acetaminophen, How canmoleculessuchas Problem Name LAB disassemble themodels. After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, dashes torepresentthebondingelectrons. first usingdots andthenusing each substance, In double covalent bonds. Identify thebondsassinglecovalent bondsor (CH Construct modelsforthesubstancesmethane in thenext column. compare tothemodels.Recordyourhypothesis hypothesis abouthow yourdrawn structureswill Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a drawn structure. Explain how adouble bondisrepresentedina drawn structure. Explain how asingle bond isrepresentedina double covalent bond. Distinguish betweenasinglecovalent bondanda Define covalent bond. Data Table1, Chemistry: Matter andChange 4 ) andcarbondioxide(CO 9.1 draw theLewis structurefor Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • Objectives 2 structural formulas. medicines anddrawtheir covalent compoundsin Examine molecules. the structureofthese Draw compounds. bonds insomecovalent the singleanddouble Construct models ). • Catr9LaboratoryManual Chapter9 a representationof models of to show Part B 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 3. 2. 1. Neatly reassemblethemodelkit. from thespheres. Be sureallsticksandspringshave beenremoved Ask yourteachertocheckwork. In and ibuprofen. acetaminophen, Examine themodelsofaspirin, bonds. substance usingdashes(—)torepresentthe Data Table2, aeClass Date pliers wooden orplasticmolecularmodelset Materials (ball andstick) LABORATORY MANUAL draw thestructuresforeach

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Name Aspirin Ibuprofen Acetaminophen LAB 9.1 Dot structureofCO Dot structureofCH 4 2 Data Table 1 Data Table 2 aeClass Date Structure ofCO Structure ofCH LABORATORY MANUAL 4 2 using dashes using dashes • Chapter9 67 68 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB those ofotherstudents. What couldhave causedany differences? Drawing aConclusion andibuprofen. acetaminophen, structural shapeasaspirin, Predicting aspirin withthemodel. Collecting andInterpreting Data diagrams. Comparing andContrasting ibuprofen have incommon? Observing andInferring Error Analysis surgery. aspirin betaken immediatelybeforeorafter Explain whysurgeons recommendthatno Aspirin isknown toinhibitbloodclotting. Chemistry: Matter andChange 9.1 Predict thepossibilityofothermedicinesthatmighthave thesamecommon opr orsrcue o sii,aeaiohn andibuprofen to acetaminophen, Compare yourstructuresforaspirin, Explain whydifferent painrelievers aremanufactured andsold. htsrcua hp oaprn ctmnpe,and acetaminophen, What structuralshapedoaspirin, Compare thecomplexity ofthebondsinall • Catr9LaboratoryManual Chapter9 Compare theappearanceofdrawn structureof 2. fever inchildrenrecovering fromthisvirus? to aspirinmightbeusedrelieve painand recovering fromchicken pox. What alternatives disease ofthebrainthatmayariseinchildren a Aspirin isassociatedwithReyes syndrome, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. E Covalent Compounds aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions cules? construct modelsofmole- pound anddraw type ofbondsinacom- How canwedeterminethe Problem Name the arrangementofatomsaccordingtotheirbondangles. are notproportionatelycorrect,themodelsusefultorepresent springs andthreesprings,respectively. Whilethesizes oftheatoms shown withsticks,whiledoubleandtriplebondsaretwo approximate theacceptedbondangles. covalent bondstheywillform.Theholesareboredatanglesthat These ballshaveholesdrilledinthemaccordingtothenumberof helpful. Coloredwoodenorplasticballsareusedtorepresentatoms. electrons isformedaroundeachatom(excepthydrogen.) complete theouterenergylevel.Inacovalentbond,anoctetof noble gasconfiguration.Bysharingelectrons,individualatomscan are calledLewisstructures.Whenbonding,atomstendtoachievea difference ofmorethan1.7. Ionic crystalsexistinthosesystemsthathaveanelectronegativity of morethanzerobutless1.7areclassifiedaspolarcovalent. covalent. Thosemoleculesthatexhibitanelectronegativitydifference electronegativity difference iszeroareconsideredtobepure covalent, polarorionic.Moleculesinwhichthe electronegativities areusedtopredictwhetherthebondispure Covalent Compounds LAB Sticks andspringsareusedtorepresentbonds.Singlebonds To studycovalentmolecules,chemistsfindtheuseof models The structuresusedtoshowthebondingincovalentmolecules lectronegativity isascaleusedtodetermineanatom for anelectroninthebondingprocess.Differences in 9.2 LABORATORY MANUAL Always wearsafetygoggles andalabapron. • • • Objectives molecules. Lewis structuresof Compare some molecules. tion ofthestructure Draw covalent compounds. the shapesofsome Construct models a Lewisrepresenta- models and to show ’ s attraction aeClass Date electronegativity tables pliers wooden orplasticmolecularmodelset Materials (ball andstick) • Chapter9 Section 9.5 Use with 69 70 3. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. Part A Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name Part B Part C LAB space provided on Draw theLewis structureforthemoleculein the bond. Recordyouransweron atoms inthemoleculeandidentifytypeof Compute theelectronegativity difference forthe Construct amodelforH Data Table2. each ofthecompounds.Recordyouranswerson percentage ofioniccharacterandbondtype Use thetablesonrighttodetermine pounds in difference betweenthe two elementsinthecom- your textbook) todeterminetheelectronegativity Use anelectronegativity table(seepage169in Record yourobservations in of holespresentinthedifferent coloredballs. sents asinglechemicalbond.Countthenumber hole thathasbeenboredintothesphererepre- Select oneofevery different colorofball.Each andtriplebonds doublebonds, bonds, single the different piecesthat representatoms, Look atyourball-and-stickmodelsets.Identify determined. Recordyourhypothesisonpage71. and inamodelhow thetypeofbondis electrons inacovalent bondinanillustration hypothesis abouthow toshow sharingof Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a orionic. polar covalent, used topredictwhetherabondispurecovalent, Describe how electronegativity differences are andcarbonform? nitrogen, hydrogen, How many covalent bondswilleachofoxygen, andcarbon. nitrogen, hydrogen, Give theelectronconfiguration ofoxygen, Define covalent bond. Chemistry: Matter andChange 9.2 Data Table2. Data Table3. 2 . Data Table1. Data Table3. • Catr9LaboratoryManual Chapter9 Table 1 Table 2 5. 4. lcrngtvt Percent Electronegativity rae hnzr polarcovalent Greater thanzero Electronegativity listed in Repeat steps1Ð4foreachofthecompounds assemble themodel. dis- After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, rae hn17ionic Greater than1.7 but lessthan1.7 Electronegativity andBondType Relationship BetweenElectronegativity ifrneTp fbn ioniccharacter Type ofbond difference ifrneBondtype difference aeClass Date . oi 92 89 86 82 ionic 76 ionic 70 ionic 63 ionic 56 3.2 ionic 3.0 ionic 2.8 ionic 2.6 48 ionic 2.4 39 2.2 30 polarcovalent 2.0 22 polarcovalent 1.8 15 polarcovalent 1.6 9 polarcovalent 1.4 4 polarcovalent 1.2 1 0 polarcovalent 1.0 polarcovalent 0.8 polarcovalent 0.6 purecovalent 0.4 0.2 0 Difference andIonicCharacter purecovalent 0 Data Table3. LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Hypothesis Name LAB oml lcrngtvt ifrnePretinccaatrType ofbond Percent ioniccharacter Electronegativity difference Formula CaCl Al NaBr MgI NaCl MgS K HBr SO HCl KCl Br CO F 2 2 alclrNme fhlsIdentityofelement Numberofholes Ball color 2 O S 9.2 2 rnebromine Orange 2 elwhydrogen Yellow upeiodine Purple re chlorine Green 2 3 2 lc carbon Black lenitrogen Blue e oxygen Red Data Table 1 Data Table 2 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Neatly reassemblethemodelkit. from thespheres. Be sureallsticksandspringshave beenremoved aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter9 71 72 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry Lewis formula Type ofbond difference Electronegativity Molecule 1. LAB the errors? structures. Doany ofthem differ inthenumber ofbonds? What couldbesomecausesfor structure cannotbeusedtopredictbondtype. Drawing aConclusion Predicting a compoundwithballandstickmodelofthecompound. Collecting andInterpreting Data Explain themeaningof Observing andInferring Error Analysis temperature andcarbondioxide isagas. Explain whywater isaliquidatroom Chemistry: Matter andChange 9.2 Predict theshapeandLewis structureforCBr Compare theballandstickmodelsyouconstructedwith yourLewis H 2 triatomic Explain whyaformulawithoutelectronegativity dataoraLewis Both water andcarbondioxidearetriatomicmolecules. Cl . 2 • Catr9LaboratoryManual Chapter9 Compare theappearanceofLewis structurefor N 2 Data Table 3 O 2 2. bonding patternofeachcompound? What dothesemeltingpoints indicateaboutthe meltsat800.7¡C. commontablesalt, (NaCl), meltsat80.2¡C.Sodiumchloride moth balls, Naphthalene (C 4 . C H HCl aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 2 OCO 10 H 8 ,acommon ingredientin ), 2 NH 3 CH 4

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Single-Replacement Reactions aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual form anactivityseries? these reactionsbeusedto How cantheresultsof replacement reactions? other elementsinsingle- What elementswillreplace Problem Name between zincandcopper(II)sulfate. metal replacesalessactivefromsolution.Considerthereaction concern ourselveswithtwodifferent kinds.Inonetype,amoreactive their reactivity. Suchalistiscalledanactivityseries. electrons. Itispossibletoarrangetheelementsintoaseriesbasedupon equation forsuchareactionisasfollows. construct anactivityseries. dilute hydrochloricacidtoshowsingle-replacement reactionsand place. copper, isplacedintoahydrochloricacidsolution,noreactionwilltake piece ofzincisconsumed.Ontheotherhand,iflessactivemetal, acid. Bubblesofhydrogengascanbeseenrisingtothesurface,and hydrochloric acid. hydrogen fromacidbyametal.Considerthereactionbetweenzincand can beseentoformonthestripofzinc. copper sulfatesolutionslowlyturnscolorlessandadepositof from solution.Thereactionisevidentbecausethebluecolorof A Single-Replacement Reactions LAB While therearemanytypesofreplacementreactions,wewill The reactivityofasubstancedependsonitsabilitytogainorlose In thisactivity, youwilluseafewmetals,theircompounds, and The zincmetalisactiveenoughtoreplacethehydrogenfrom A secondtypeofreplacementreactioninvolvesthe In thisreaction,themoreactivezincreplaceslesscopper single-replacement chemicalreactionisoneinwhichsubstance from acompoundisreplacedbyanothersubstance.Ageneric 10.1 Zn(s) Zn(s) LABORATORY MANUAL CuSO 2HCl(aq) • • • Objectives A activity series. Sequence reactions. single-replacement balanced equationsfor Use numbers chemical reactions. single-replacement Classify 4 (aq) BC 0 0 0 reactions as ZnCl AC ZnSO metals intoan to write 2 (aq) 4 B (aq) H Cu(s) 2 (g) aeClass Date zinc (1-cm Materials 0.2 0.2 sandpaper lead (1-cm copper (1-cm strip) 3-cm strips)(2) strips) (3) sulfate (CuSO nitrate (Pb(NO M M copper (II) lead (II) 3-cm 3-cm 4 ) 3 ) 2 ) 0.2 0.2 test-tube rack test tubes(6) 3 M • sulfate (MgSO (AgNO acid (HCl) Chapter10 M M hydrochloric magnesium silver nitrate Section 10.2 3 ) Use with 4 ) 73 74 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name LAB 10 mLof0.2 Place astripofzincintotesttube#4andadd 10 mLof3 Place astripofcopperintotesttube#3andadd 10 mLof0.2 Place astripofcopperintotesttube#2andadd 10 mLof0.2 Place theleadstripintotesttube#1andadd and thenreexamine thetesttube. wait about10minutes is noticeableimmediately, of achemicalreactionin observe andrecordany indication For steps4Ð9, zinc. andthreepiecesof two piecesofcopper, lead, Use sandpapertothoroughlycleanonepieceof Number sixcleantesttubes1through6. column. formulated. Recordyourhypothesisinthenext hypothesis abouthow anactivity seriescanbe Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a less active metal. Distinguish betweenamoreactive metalanda Explain whatdeterminesthereactivity ofametal. What isasingle-replacementreaction? Chemistry: Matter andChange 10.1 M M M M hydrochloric acid. lead(II) nitratesolution. silver nitrate. copper(II) sulfate solution. Data Table1. Hydrochloric acidiscorrosive toskin,istoxic,andreacts withmetals. • Silvernitratesolutionishighlytoxicandwillstainskinorclothing. • Magnesiumsulfatemayirritatetheeyes. • Leadnitrateandcopper(II)sulfateare moderatelytoxicbyingestionor • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • inhalation. • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter10 If nosign 9. 8. 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 10 mLof3 Place astripofzincintotesttube#6andadd 10 mLof0.2 Place astripofzincintotesttube#5andadd lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken or damagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyourteacher. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M M hydrochloric acid. magnesium sulfate solution.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name ettb ubrChemicalequation Test-tube number Indicationofachemicalreaction Test-tube number ettb ubrSmo fmr cieeeetSymboloflessactiveelement Symbolofmore activeelement Test-tube number LAB Table 3 was lessactive ineachofthesixtestsconducted.Summarizeinformation Observing andInferring Measuring andUsingNumbers Table 2. 10.1 Zn 6 Zn Zn Cu 5 Cu 4 Pb 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 by writingthesymbolofelementinappropriate space. fn ecinwsosre,write If noreactionwas observed, HCl MgSO Pb(NO CuSO HCl AgNO Identify whichelementwas moreactive andwhichelement 0 0 4 4 3 3 0 ) 0 0 2 Complete andbalanceeachoftheequationsin 0 no reaction Data Table 1 Data Table 3 Data Table 2 . aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Data • Chapter10 75 76 10. Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB Explain any differences. hydrogen inthisactivity series? Predicting hydrogen inthisactivity series. Drawing aConclusion Sequencing active tomostactive. Sequencing was mostactive andwhichmetalwas leastactive. Zn, Cu, PH, three metals, Drawing aConclusion Collecting andInterpreting Data Collecting andInterpreting Data sodium isonlyfoundincompounds innature. Sodium isavery active metal.Explainwhy containers. Explain whyacidsarenot stored insteel Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 10.1 What additionaltestwould benecessarytoestablishtheexact positionof rag h easP,C,Z,A,adM nodro ciiy fromleast andMginorderofactivity, Ag, Zn, Cu, Arrange themetalsPb, shdoe oeatv rls cieta u n g andMg? Ag, Zn, Is hydrogenmoreactive orlessactive thanCu, Compare youractivity seriestooneinatextbook orreferencebook. Cite theexperimental evidence usedtoestablishthelocationof Cite theexperimental evidence thatindicatedwhichofthe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter10 ftetremtl,P,C,Z,whichistheleastactive? Zn, Cu, Pb, Of thethreemetals, whichisthemostactive? Zn, Cu, Pb, Of thethreemetals, 3. of reactions. of concentrationhydrochloric acidonrates mightbeusedtostudytheeffect copper metal, ratherthan Explain whymagnesiummetal, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Double-Replacement Reactions aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions • • Objectives be identified? replacement reactions How candouble- Problem Name reaction isusuallygenericallyshownas reactions aresometimescalledionicreactions. reaction iscalledadouble-replacementreaction.Double-replacement of negativeionsinthesolution.Sometimesareactiontakesplace.This mixed, alltypesofpositiveionsinthenewsolutionareattractedto are aprecipitate,gas,orslightlyionizedmaterial,suchaswater. Products thatremoveionsfromsolutioninadouble-replacementreaction A reactiontakesplaceifacompoundformsthatremovesionsfromsolution. negative BandDions,theseoppositelychargedionsattracteachother. W Double-Replacement Reactions replacement reactions. equations fordouble- Write ment chemicalreactions. Identify LAB In thistypeofreaction,theionstwocompoundschangeplaces.Sucha As thesolutionsaremixed,positiveAandCionsexistinsolution,asdo hen ioniccompoundsdissolveinwater, theionsincrystalseparate balanced chemical and movethroughoutthesolution.Whentwosuchsolutionsare double-replace- 10.2 LABORATORY MANUAL Potassiumnitrateisaskin irritant. • Magnesiumsulfatemayirritate theeyes. • Lead(II)nitrateandsodium sulfiteare moderately toxic. • Iron(III) chlorideandzincnitrateare tissueirritantsandare slightlytoxic. • Copper(II)sulfateismoderately toxicbyingestionorinhalation. • Bariumchlorideishighlytoxic. • Ammoniumchlorideisslightlytoxic. • Sodiumhydroxide iscorrosive. • Hydrochloric acidandsulfuricare toxicandcorrosive toskinandreact • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetyglasses,alabapron, andgloves. • with metals. AB 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3 Materials 6 2 0.2 0.2 0.2 M M M CD M M M M M M M hydrochloric acid(HCl) hydrochloric acid(HCl) sodium hydroxide(NaOH) 0 potassium iodide(KI) copper(II) sulfate(CuSO ammonium chloride(NH iron(III) chloride(FeCl barium chloride(BaCl potassium nitrate(KNO sodium carbonate(Na AD CB aeClass Date 3 2 2 ) ) CO 3 4 ) ) 4 Cl) 3 ) 10-mL graduatedcylinder thermometer test-tube racks(2) test tubes(10) 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 M M M M M lead(II) nitrate(Pb(NO sodium sulfate(Na sodium chloride(NaCl) zinc nitrate(Zn(NO sodium sulfite(Na • Chapter10 Section 10.2 2 2 SO 3 Use with SO ) 2 ) 3 3 4 ) ) ) 2 ) 77 78 umn of col- inthe“EvidenceofReaction” “No Reaction” record no evidence ofachemical reactionisevident, in temperatureasevidence forformationofwater. If tube todetermineifheatisreleased.Usetheincrease insert athermometerintothecontentsoftest ifnoproductisimmediatelyvisible, Therefore, energy isusuallygiven off. ous. When water forms, gas forms. The formationof water willnotbeobvi- noteifaprecipitateor For eachofthefollowing, Procedure Pre-Lab Name 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB hydroxide. test tube.Slowly add3mLof2 Pour 3mLof sodium sulfate. clean testtube.Slowly add3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof0.2 hydrochloric acid. clean testtube.Slowly add3mLof6 Pour 3mLof0.2 nitrate. test tube.Slowly add 3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof0.2 copper(II) sulfate. clean testtube.Slowly add3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof2 test yourhypothesis. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow to the next column. gone tocompletion.Recordyourhypothesisin indicate thatadouble-replacementreactionhas hypothesis aboutwhatobservable productswill Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a Define reaction. Explain themechanismofadouble-replacement Chemistry: Matter andChange Data Table1. 10.2 precipitate M M M M M . hydrochloric acidintoaclean sodium hydroxideintoa barium chlorideintoa sodium carbonateintoa sodium chlorideintoaclean M • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter10 M sodium potassium M M M 10. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 9. 8. 7. 6. 4. 3. 2. 1. iodide. test tube.Slowly add 3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof0.2 copper(II) sulfate. a cleantesttube.Slowly add3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof0.2 3 into acleantesttube.Slowly add1mLof fume hood. Perform thisreaction inthe CAUTION: iron(III) chloride. clean testtube.Slowly add3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof2 sulfate. test tube.Slowly add3mLof0.2 Pour 3mLof0.2 lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken or damagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyour M aeClass Date hydrochloric acid. LABORATORY MANUAL Pour 3mLof0.2 M M M M sodium hydroxideintoa lead(II) nitrateintoaclean ammonium chlorideinto zinc nitrateintoaclean M sodium sulfite M M potassium copper(II) M M

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name ettb ubrEvidenceofreaction Test-tube number LAB each reactantandproduct. Besuretoshow thestatefor formed. Ifnoreactionwas observed write“NoReaction.” Interpreting Data 10.2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Write balancedchemicalequationsforeachofthereactionsper- Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter10 79 80 3. 2. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB caused any differences? solutions. Making Predictions Error Analysis diagnosis ofthegastrointestinalsystem. Explain whybariumsulfate isusedinX-ray Chemistry: Matter andChange 10.2 Compare yourdatatablewithothersinclass. What couldhave Predict theresultofmixingsulfuricacidandpotassiumhydroxide • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter10 2. uha iea,inthekitchen. such asvinegar, is effective in cleaningupaspillofanacid, Explain whyusingabasesuchasbakingsoda aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Estimating theSizeofaMole aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions amounts? not incountingeveryday when countingatomsbut is Avogadro How muchisamole?Why Problem Name number byfindingthemassandvolumeofonemoleobject. you willrelateacommonobjecttotheconceptofAvogadro A Estimating theSizeofaMole of splitpeas.Recordyourhypothesisonpage82. hypothesis astothemassandvolume ofamole Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a many moleswould thatbe? how If youhad24.65gofaluminumchloride, aluminum chloride(AlCl of Determine themassof1molgold(Au), What isthevalue of Avogadro’s number? (C LAB vogadro 6 or formulaunits)thatareinamoleofsubstance.Inthislab, H 12 O 6 ’ ). 11.1 s numberused ’ s numberistheofparticles(atoms,molecules, LABORATORY MANUAL 3 ,andofglucose ), Pickupanysplitpeasthatspillonthefloor. • Donotspillsplitpeasdownthesinkdrain. • Nevereatortasteanysubstancesusedinthelab. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives compounds. volumes ofatomsand peas tothemassesand volume ofamolesplit Compare peas. volume ofamolesplit Calculate calculate mass ofasplitpeaand Measure the average the massand its volume. the massand 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure Data Table1. the 100mLofsplitpeas.Record thismassin Measure themassofgraduated cylinder and peas. graduated cylinder tothe 100-mLlinewithsplit fill the Using thenotebookpaperasafunnel, Table 1. andrecordthis mass in the 25splitpeas, Obtain themassofgraduatedcylinder and graduated cylinder. Count outexactly 25split peas.Placetheminthe mass in mass oftheemptygraduatedcylinder. Recordthis determinethe Using abalanceorelectronicscale, aeClass Date sheet ofnotebook 100-mL graduated split peas balance Materials paper cylinder ’ s Data Table1. • Chapter11 Section 11.3 Use with Data 81 82 4. 3. 2. 1. Record theresultsofeachfollowing calculationsin Data andObservations Hypothesis Name oueo n oeo pi es mL kg mL g g g Volume of onemoleofsplitpeas Mass ofonemolesplitpeas g Find themassandvolumeofamolesplitpeas: g Volume of onesplitpea Number ofsplitpeasin100mL(cm Mass of100mL(cm Mass of100mLsplitpeasandgraduatedcylinder Find thevolumeofonesplitpea: Mass ofonesplitpea Mass of25splitpeas Mass of25splitpeasandgraduatedcylinder Mass ofemptygraduatedcylinder Find themassofonesplitpea: LAB of splitpeasin100mL. calculatethenumber From themassof100mLsplitpeasand ofonesplitpea, Calculate themassof100mLsplitpeas. Calculate themassofonesplitpea. calculate themassof25splitpeas. From themassesyoumeasured, Chemistry: Matter andChange 11.1 3 pi esg ) splitpeas Data Table 1 3 ) • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter11 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Data Table1. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. cylinder intothestoragecontainer. Empty allofthesplitpeasfromgraduated aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 7. 6. 5. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB of 1molsplitpeas. peas comparetotheactualvalues youcalculatedduringthelab? Drawing Conclusions andglucoseyoucalculatedinthepre-lab? aluminum chloride, Comparing mass ofjustonesplitpea? Observing andInferring calculatethevolume of1molsplitpeas. In asimilarmanner, Using Avogadro’s number(6.02 calculatethevolume ofonesplitpea. From thenumberofsplitpeasin100mL, Error Analysis these amounts? of shoes? Why aren’t moles usedtomeasure to measurethenumberofeggs? The number daily life. What isacommonunityouuse Different unitsareusedtocountobjectsin 11.1 How doesthemassof amoleofsplitpeascomparewiththemassesgold, How didyourhypothesis astothemassandvolume ofamolesplit Why is Avogadro’s numberusefulwhendiscussingatoms? Why was themassof25splitpeasdeterminedratherthan 10 23 n h aso n pi e,calculatethemass ) andthemassofonesplitpea, 2. if youaretraveling inaforeigncountry? be abletochangefromoneunitanother monetary systems. Why isitimportantto volume tomoles. Think oftheworld’s youchangedunitsofmass and In thelab, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter11 83

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Mole Ratios aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions be determined? pound? Howcanthisratio to anionsinanioniccom- What istheratioofcations Problem Name solution withsufficient silvernitrate(AgNO present. Onesuchcationissilver. Reactingachloride-containing compound canbeusedtodeterminetheamountofchlorideions dissolved chlorideionswithacationthatformsaninsoluble chloride compoundsdissolveinwater, butsomedonot.Reacting How couldyoudeterminethemoleratiosinthesecompounds?Most concentration willrequiretwiceasmuchAgNO amount ofAgNO any dissolvedchlorideions.AsolutionofKClwillreactwithacertain 1 molMgBr there are2molofBr ions toBr water solution,onemoleofKBrwillproduce1molBr the Cl Mole Ratios LAB Suppose youhavedifferent compoundsthatcontainCl of small,wholenumbers.Forexample,themoleratioMg he moleratioofcationstoanionsinanioniccompoundconsists ions. 11.2 ions inMgBr 2 will produce2molBr 3 . ThesamevolumeofBaCl LABORATORY MANUAL ions. ThemoleratioofionsinKBris1:1.In 2 is 1:2.Forevery1molofMg Silvernitrateandbariumchlorideare toxic.Potassiumchlorideand • Silvernitrateiscorrosive andwillstainskinclothing. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • • • • Objectives pound. ion inanunknowncom- positive iontochloride Determine four chloridecompounds. itive iontochloridein Calculate compounds. of variouschloride solution withsolutions ratios ofsilvernitrate Measure aluminum chlorideare slightlytoxic. ions. the reacting the ratioofpos- the ratioof 3 ) solutionwillprecipitate 2 solution ofthesame 3 to precipitateall 2 ions, but ions present, aeClass Date 0.10 Materials 0.10 0.10 0.10 (AgNO chloride (KCl) chloride (NaCl) chloride (BaCl ions. M M M M 2 silver nitrate potassium sodium barium 3 ) 2 ) 0.10 dropper 10-mL graduated test tubes(10) dichlorofluorescein • cylinder chloride (AlCl Chapter11 M aluminum Section 11.4 Use with 3 ) 85 86 Data andObservations 4. 3. 2. 1. Testing knownsolutions Part A: Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name Unknown AlCl BaCl drops of AgNO NaCl KCl Sample LAB pink. drops neededtoturnthesolutionfromwhite Count andrecordin solution. as thedropsarebeingadded.Donotspillany drops. Carefullyshake thetubefromsideto pink. Holdthedroppervertically asyouaddthe until thedichlorofluorosceinturnsfromwhiteto Add silver nitratedropbytothesolution solution tothetesttube. Add 2dropsofdichlorofluorosceinindicator dry testtube. Pour 1.00mLoftheKClsolutionintoaclean, between AgNO What isthenetionicequationforreaction your hypotheses. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow totest your hypothesesinthenext column. anion ratioinanunknown substance.Record these ratioscanbeusedtodeterminethecation volumes. Form asecondhypothesisabouthow hypothesis abouttheexpected ratiosofreacting Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a number ofmolesasubstance? What doyouneedtoknow tocalculatethe What ismeantbytheterm 3 2 Chemistry: Matter andChange 11.2 3 (aq) andKCl(aq)? Data Table1 ra ra vrg Cation/anion Average Trial 2 Trial 1 mole 3 ? • the numberof Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter11 drops of AgNO Data Table 1 3 Hypotheses 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal concentration Testing asolutionofunknown Part B: and AlCl instead ofKCl. usingtheunknown solution Repeat steps1Ð5, Record thenumberofsample. Obtain anunknown samplefromyourteacher. BaCl usingsolutionsofNaCl, Repeat steps1Ð5, of KCl. Repeat theprocedureforasecond1-mLsample lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken or damagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. container provided byyourteacher. Pour any materialscontainingsilver intoa aeClass Date drops of AgNO 3 LABORATORY MANUAL ntr,insteadofKCl. inturn, , 3 ratio 2 ,

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB measurements? formulas ofthecompoundstested. Drawing Conclusions KCl solutionifhalfasmuch AgNO solution. How would thisunknown concentrationcomparewiththeof Making Predictions Inferring your hypothesisusingtheformulasforcompounds? Comparing cation toanionratioforeachoftheknown solutions.Recordtheseratiosin calculatethe ionic compoundperliterofsolution.Usingthisinformationandyourresults, whichmeansthatthey allcontainthesamenumberofmoles the sameconcentration, Using Numbers Using Numbers solution. Recordthesenumbersin Error Analysis this labactivity beappliedtosuchtesting? substances. How couldthetechniquesusedin ties todeterminetheconcentrations ofcertain Body fluidsareoftentested inmedicalfacili- 11.2 Why mustallthesolutionsbeingtestedbesameconcentration? How doyouranswersinquestion2comparewiththeratiosyoupredicted Assume thatthecation-anionratiois1:1forKCl. All thesolutionsare Calculate theaverage numberofdrops AgNO What couldyouhave donetoimprove theprecisionof Assume youdidnotknow theconcentrationofsilver nitrate Summarize how theresults ofthislaboratoryactivity relatetothe Data Table1. 3 solution asKClwas used? 2. solutions youdisposedofin thediscardbeaker. could separateany dissolved Ag Silver isavaluable metal.Explainhow you aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 3 used foreach Data Table1. • Chapter11 ions fromthe 87

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Observing aLimitingReactant aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions reaction? reactant inachemical predict thelimiting concept beusedto How canthemole Problem Name limiting reactant. chemical equation,youcanpredictwhichsubstanceinareactionisthe reactant up, thereactionstops.Thereactantthatisusedupcalled an excessofonethereactants.Assoonasotherreactantisused amounts ofthereactantsarerarelyusedinareaction.Usually, thereis balanced chemicalequationforthereaction.Inlaboratory, precise react completelywitheachotherbymeansofmoleratiosbasedonthe W Observing aLimitingReactant b. a. Calculate balanced chemicalreactionforthereaction. magnesium chlorideandhydrogengas. Write the Magnesium andhydrochloricacidreacttoform LAB magnesium. the numberofmolesmagnesiumin5.0g in 10mLof6.0 the numberofmoleshydrochloric acid 6 molesofHClperliter solution. determine whatamountsofthetworeactantsareneededto hen twosubstancesreact,theyreactinexactamounts.You can . Basedonthequantitiesofeachreactantandbalanced 12.1 M LABORATORY MANUAL HCl; 6.0 Objectives • • • • predicted results. Compare the limitingreactant. equation, whichsubstancewillbe Predict and magnesium. for thereactionofhydrochloricacid Write each reactant. Calculate Donotuseopenflamesinthelab.Hydrogen gasisflammable. • Handleacidscarefully. • Donotinhalereleased vapors. • Pointopenendoftest tubeawayfrom your faceandawayfrom others. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • M a balancedchemicalequation HCl contains , usingthebalancedchemical the actualresultswithyour the numberofmoles 5. 4. 3. Record yourhypothesison page90. and7intheexperiment. 6, ing reactantatsteps5, hypothesis aboutwhichreactant willbethelimit- Read theentirelaboratory activity. Form a words. Describe theterm bined? What would beusedup? magnesium andhydrochloricacidwerecom- whatwould beleftover iftheseamountsof tions, Based onthechemicalequationandyourcalcula- aeClass Date limiting Materials dropper bottlecontaining6 magnesium ribbon(2pieces, 20 test-tube rack test-tube holder 3 – 5 cmeach) limiting reactant 150-mm testtube • Chapter12 in yourown Section 12.3 Use with M HCl 89 90 Mass ofMg(g) Data andObservations 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure Name usac()Observations Mg Mg Mg Mg Mg Substance(s) LAB the reaction. observations duringand immediatelyfollowing drops of6 addanotherten After thereactionhasstopped, test-tube rackandaddtendropsof6 Place thetesttubecontainingmagnesiumina put itintothetesttube. Bend thepieceofmagnesiumseveral timesand magnesium. andtexture of yourpiece length, the color, recordyourobservations of In thedatatable, in step8. of magnesium.Setthesecondpieceasidetouse Determine andrecordthemassoffirst piece 3Ð5 cmlong. Obtain two piecesofmagnesiumribbonthatare side ofthetesttube. into testtube.Observe thereaction from the Donotinhale vapors orlookdown CAUTION: and immediatelyfollowing thereaction. Record in Chemistry: Matter andChange 22 dropsHCl(ifneeded) 21 dropsHCl(ifneeded) 20 dropsHCl 10 dropsHCl 12.1 M Data Table1 HCl tothetesttube.Recordany any observations during • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter12 M HCl. Data Table 1 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 8. 7. 2. test tube. Useatest-tube holdertomove the CAUTION: in thefumehoodasinstructedbyyourteacher. Dispose ofthewaste materialinawaste container the testtubeandrecordyourobservations. Place thesecondpieceofmagnesiumribboninto nesium ribboninthetesttubehasreacted. drops ofhydrochloricacidwhenallthemag- after eachdrophasstoppedreacting.Stopadding watching thereactionandrecordingobservations Now begin adding6 before leaving thelab. Clean upyourlabareaandwash yourhands aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M HCl onedropofatatime,

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data Table1, Name usac()Observations HCl Mg Mg Mg Substance(s) LAB completely reactwiththefirst stripofmagnesium? Measuring andUsingNumbers you abletodeterminethis? andstep7.How were step6, substance was thelimitingreactantatendofstep5, Collecting andInterpreting Data was addedtothetesttube.Diditreact? Why orwhynot? Observing andInferring with allofthemagnesium? Observing andInferring 25 dropsHCl(ifneeded) 24 dropsHCl(ifneeded) 23 dropsHCl(ifneeded) second pieceofmagnesium 12.1 continued What was thetotalnumberofdropsHClneededtoreact Explain whathappenedwhenthesecondpieceofmagnesium What volume of6 ae nyu bevtos describewhich Based onyourobservations, M HCl would benecessaryto aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter12 91 92 6. 5. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB be thesourcesoferror? drops orfewer dropsofHClwhileusingasimilarsizepiecemagnesium? What could determine thestoichiometricratioofMgtoHClateachstepinthislab? Thinking Critically Error Analysis limiting reactant? to beabledeterminewhichreactantisthe Why isitimportantforachemicalmanufacturer Chemistry: Matter andChange 12.1 Compare yourdatawiththatofclassmates.Didothersusemore What stepswould needtobeaddedthislabaccurately • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter12 2. used whendiscussingautomobiles? How would theideaoflimitingreactantsbe aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. M Determining ReactionRatios aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions different bases? needed toneutralizethree hydrochloric acidwillbe What volumeof1 Problem Name can predictthepointatwhichasolutionbecomesneutral. hydrogen ionsandhydroxideinthebalancedchemicalequation,you neutral substances thationizetoproducehydroxide(OH and producehydrogen(H substance calledabase.Acidscanbedefinedassubstancesthatdissociate experiment, youwillreactasubstancecalledanacidwithanother dissolve inwater. Whenacidsandbasesreactwitheachother, theH has anexcessofeitherH and OH Determining ReactionRatios Which arebases? equations forthereactions. Which areacids? forms ionswhenplacedin water andwritethe Determine how eachsubstanceusedinthislab LAB ole ratioscanbeusedtodeterminetheamountofonesubstance needed toreactwithagivenamountofanothersubstance.Inthis . Thisprocessiscalledneutralization.Byusingthemoleratioof ions jointoformwater(H 12.2 M LABORATORY MANUAL ions orOH ) ionswhendissolvedinwater. Basesare Readalllabelsbefore mixingchemicals. • Filltheburette carefully withbase. • Usecautionwhenworkingwithacidsandbases. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • • Objectives used inthisactivity. of theacidandbases Calculate hydrochloric acid. a givenamountof base neededtoneutralize Measure of theacidandbases. released upondissociation numbers ofionsthatare Determine acids orbases. Classify 2 O). Theresultingsolutionnolonger substances as the amountof ions. Thesolutionhasbecome the moleratios the typesand ) ionswhenthey 2. c. b. a. the following doublereplacementreactions: Write abalancedchemicalreactionforeachof hydroxide hydrochloric acidreactswith ammonium hydrochloric acidreactswith bariumhydroxide hydrochloric acidreactswith sodiumhydroxide aeClass Date 1.0 Materials 1.0 50-mL graduated 125-mL Erlenmeyer 1.0 1.0 cylinder flask acid (HCl) (NH hydroxide hydroxide (NaOH) (Ba(OH) hydroxide M M M M 4 hydrochloric ammonium sodium barium OH) 2 ) ions waste beakeror burette clamps(3) phenolphthalein wash bottlewith ring stands(3) glass funnel 50-mL burette(3) 150-mL beakers(3) • other container indicator distilled water Chapter12 Section 12.3 Use with 93 94 5. 4. 3. 2. Figure A 1. may begin atstep7. you Ifyourinstructorhassetuptheburettes, Note: Procedure 5. 4. 3. Name LAB barium hydroxide NaOH. Fill thisburette tothe zero (0mL)linewith beaker. Empty this5mLofNaOH rinseintoawaste burette tocoattheentireinsidewithsolution. clamp andswirlthe5mLofNaOHaround to thefirst burette. Take theburette outofthe addabout5 mLofNaOH Using theglassfunnel, of eachthesolutionslistedinstep2. obtainabout75mL Using theappropriatebeaker, Label your150-mLbeakers Figure A. Set upeachofthethreeburettes asshown in performing thisactivity? What safetyprecautionsshouldyoufollow when used inthisactivity? solution? Why isasolutionofphenolphthalein tion? What colorisphenolphthaleininabasic What colorisphenolphthaleininanacidicsolu- Record yourhypothesisinthenext column. which substanceyouwillhave tousetheleastof. have tousethemostofneutralizeacidand hypothesis thatpredictswhichsubstanceyouwill know whenthesolutionisneutral?Formulate a Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. How willyou Chemistry: Matter andChange Ring stand clamp Buret 12.2 and , ammonium hydroxide sodium hydroxide 50-mL buret flask Erlenmeyer 125-mL • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter12 . , 10. Hypothesis 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. 9. 8. 7. 6. zero. NaOH. The initialreadingdoesnothave tobe volume ofsolutionintheburette containingthe in Figure A. asillustrated burette tothesideofflask, acid. sodium hydroxidesolutionintothehydrochloric open thestopcockandbegin torunsomeofthe containing theNaOH. While swirlingtheflask, Place theErlenmeyer flaskundertheburette In indicator. Swirlthemixture. flask andadd2Ð3dropsofphenolphthalein Pour the25-mLofHClintoErlenmeyer 25 mLofHCl. measure Using your50-mLgraduatedcylinder, steps 4and5usingBa(OH) Rinse thefunnelwithdistilledwater. Repeat using theBa(OH) amounts ofdistilledwater. Repeatsteps7Ð14 Rinse yourErlenmeyer flaskwithgenerous directions. of thesolutionaccordingtoyourteacher’s Check yourcolorwithteacheranddispose solution inyourburette. In when thelightpinkcolordoesnotdisappear. and swirling.Stopaddingsodiumhydroxide Continue toalternateaddingsodiumhydroxide flask untilthecolordisappears. stop theflow ofsodium hydroxide.Swirlthe When youbegin toseepinkswirlsintheflask, rinse theflaskaftereachtrial. nel withdistilledwater eachtime. the othertwo burettes. Besuretorinsethefun- aeClass Date Data Table1, Data Table1, ATO:Donottouch thetipof CAUTION: LABORATORY MANUAL observe andrecordtheinitial record thefinal volume ofthe 2 and theNH 2 and NH 4 OH. Besureto 4 OH and

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Name LAB that youwroteinthepre-lab? Drawing aConclusion acid tovolume ofbase. Collecting andInterpreting Data the leastamountusedtogreatestamount. Collecting andInterpreting Data Wash yourhandswithsoapandwater beforeleaving thelabarea. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Clean upyourlabareaincludingany spillsonthelabtable. ra nfaki uet oue(L oue(L mLbaseused volume(mL) volume(mL) inburette inflask Trial # Ba(OH) NaOH 3NH2 1 12.2 Lo C Sbtne uet nta Burette final Burette initial Substance mL ofHCl How dotheratiosfromquestion2comparewithequations 4 o ahnurlzto,give theratioofvolume of For eachneutralization, Rank thevolumes ofthebasesusedinorderfrom OH 2 Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter12 95 96 5. 4. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB quantities differ. equations? Discussany errorthatmayhave occurredintheactivity thatmadethese Predicting do youthinkwould happeniftheseconcentrationsweredifferent? means thateachsolutioncontains1molofdissolved substanceperliterofsolution. What Error Analysis necessary foragardenertousethisproduct? containing hydrochloricacid. Why mightitbe Muriatic acidcanbesoldaspartofapowder Chemistry: Matter andChange 12.2 nti ciiy theconcentrationofeachreactantswas 1.0 In thisactivity, How didyourvolumetric ratioscomparewiththemolein • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter12 2. products oftheindustriesinyourarea? environment? What aresomeofthewaste products thatarebeingreleasedintothe to beableidentifyandquantifywaste Why would itbenecessaryformanufacturers aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M which ,

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Freezing Bacteria aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 13 Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions water? affect thefreezingpointof ice-nucleating protein How doesthepresenceof Problem Name freeze. study theeffect ofINPonthetemperatureatwhichwaterbeginsto found ongrasses,trees,andotherplants.Inthisactivity, youwill (INP) canbeextractedfrom molecules andassistinthefreezingprocess.Ice-nucleatingproteins if ice-nucleatingparticlesarepresent.Theseattractwater 0°C. Thetemperatureatwhichwaterbeginstofreezecanbealtered W Freezing Bacteria the testtubesusedinPart B? Why isitimportanttohave equivalent volumes in the experimental design? do thetesttubescontaining distilledwater playin Read over theentire laboratoryactivity. What role LAB lattice. Atstandardpressure,thefreezingpointofwateris hen liquidwaterfreezes,themoleculesformacrystal 13.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Pseudomonas syringae Observeproper hygienewhenhandlingbacterialprotein. Besure to • Organismsorsubstancesextractedfrom organismsshouldalwaysbe • Disposeofwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • • • Objectives bacteria. containing ice-nucleating water anddistilled temperature fordistilled between timeand Graph bacteria. containing ice-nucleating and distilledwater points ofdistilledwater Compare handling theprotein. wear glovesandwashyourhandswithantibacterial soapafter treated asiftheywere hazardous. the relationship the freezing , abacteriathatis 3. page 98. temperature ofwater. Recordyourhypothesis on nucleating proteinwillhave onthefreezing Form ahypothesisabouttheeffect anice- aeClass Date 4 Materials solid rubber test-tube rack test tubes(7) small-tip dropping 600-mL beaker 10-mL graduated 4-mL graduated ice-nucleating M test tubes(3) stoppers tofit pipettes (2) cylinder pipettes (2) protein CaCl 2 solution graph paper spatula stirring rod thermometer test-tube utility ring stand crushed ice distilled water labels clamps (2) clamps (2) Section 13.4 Use with 97 98 Part B 13. 12. 11. 10. Part A Procedure Name 4. 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB the beaker containingthe iceandtheCaCl Clamp thetesttubesand thermometersin water tothetesttubemarked add4mLdistilled Using agraduatedpipette, tube marked stock INPmixturepreparedinPart A tothetest add4 mL ofthe Using agraduatedpipette, clean testtube Label onecleantesttube for Part B. Remove thetesttubesandsave thecoolingbath test tubesicecrystalsformsooner. Observe thetesttubestodetermineinwhich containing theiceandCaCl Place allfourtesttubesintothebeaker each ofthetwo testtubeslabeled Place 1smalldropofthedistilledwater into distilled water. decantsome Using acleandroppingpipette, remaining solutionforPart B. the two testtubeslabeled Place 1smalldropofthesolutionintoeach the stockINPsolution. decantsomeof Using acleandroppingpipette, two testtubes Label two testtubes Add enough4 beaker. Put about400mLofcrushediceintoa600-mL mixed. few timesuntiltheproteinandwater arewell Stopper thetesttubeandshake thetesttubea ice-nucleating proteintothewater. and thenuseaspatulatoadd4or5granulesof Pour 10mLofdistilledwater intothetesttube Label atesttube in DataandObservations. insert athermometer. Recordthistemperature Stir themixturewithastirringrodandthen shown in hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr1 Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 13 13.1 Figure A. INP M H H 2 2 CaCl . O stock INP O . . Make surethatthebulbs of INP 2 solution tocover theice. and asecondsetof INP INP . H . Save the and asecond 2 2 O solution. H . 2 O . 2 ,as 600-mL beaker Thermometers with ice,CaCl Figure A Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 3. 2. 1. 5. Test tubes of liquidandsolid. the testtubecontents: respective datatables. Also recordthephaseof the temperatureevery 4minfor60inthe Table 2 soap beforeleaving the lab. Wash your handsthoroughlywithantibacterial Return alllabequipmentto itsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofmaterialsasinstructedbyyour temperature ofthe Data Table1 Record thetemperatureof r npsto,donotmove them. are inposition, test tube.Oncethetubesandthermometers and nottouchingthebottomorsidesof the thermometersaresuspendedinliquid aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 2 in therow marked in therow marked H 2 O liquid test tubein 0 min , solid INP . Then record . Then 0 min ora , Ring stand clamps Test-tube clamps Thermometer test tubein Data and the mixture

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Initial temperatureofCaCl Data andObservations Name mn °)(C hs mn °)(C Phase (°C) (°C) (min) Phase (°C) (°C) (min) ieTmeauetmeaueTm eprtr temperature Temperature Time temperature Temperature Time mn °)(C hs mn °)(C Phase (°C) (°C) (min) Phase (°C) (°C) (min) ieTmeauetmeaueTm eprtr temperature Temperature Time temperature Temperature Time LAB 860 56 52 48 44 28 24 20 16 12 860 56 52 48 44 28 24 20 16 12 840436032 840436032 13.1 hneo Changeof Change of hneo Changeof Change of 2 solution andwater (¡C) Data Table 2:Water Data Table 1:INP ______aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter13 99 100 6. 5. 4. 3. Part B 2. 1. Part A Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB the temperatureofanice-water mixture? solidify beforethewater dropletsintheothersetoftesttubes? Drawing aConclusion each testtube?How does INPaffect thetemperatureatwhichwater begins tofreeze? Acquiring and Analyzing Information same graph. Making andUsingGraphs Thinking Critically Observing andInferring Error Analysis plants. of INPfromplantsurfaces couldhelpthe mately destroys thecells.Explainhow removal whichulti- damage thecellwalls oftheplants, theicecrystals thatform When cropsfreeze, Chemistry: Matter andChange 13.1 What sourcesoferrormighthave beenintroducedinthislab? What was thepurposeofCaCl Why didthewater dropletsinonesetoftesttubesbegin to What was thetemperatureoficeandCaCl Plot timeversus temperatureforbothINPandwater onthe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter13 At whichtemperaturedidicebegin formingin 2. 2 drying. the skislopes.Explainprocessoffreeze- making isfreeze-driedbeforeitshippedto freezing point.Ice-nucleatingproteinforsnow- temperature isslightlyabove water’s normal even iftheair before reachingtheground, protein causesmoredropletsofwater tofreeze nucleating proteinsderived frombacteria. The Modern snowmaking equipmentutilizesice- nteie Hn:Whatwould be in theice?(Hint: aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 2 mixture?

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Boiling Points aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions distinguish substances? a substancebeusedto Can theboilingpointof Problem Name can determinetheboilingpointofasubstance. to vaporize.Bymeasuringtemperatureataconstantpressure,you boiling point,moleculesthroughouttheliquidhaveenoughenergy pressure ofaliquidequalstheexternalatmosphericpressure.At substances todiffer. Theboilingpointoccurswhenthevapor Molecular polarityandmolecularsizecausetheboilingpointsof W Boiling Points point ofwater. Give areasonfor yourprediction. tested willbegreaterorlessthantheboiling Predict whethertheboilingpointsofliquids prediction onpage102. Record yourhypothesisandthebasisfor substance canbeusedtodistinguishsubstances. hypothesis aboutwhethertheboilingpointofa Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a LAB forces ofattractionbetweenmoleculesbecomeimportant. hen thekinetic-moleculartheoryisappliedtoliquids, 13.2 LABORATORY MANUAL Performthisexperimentonlyinawell-ventilatedroom. • Assumetheliquidsare flammable.Usehotplates;donotusearound • Vapors givenoff mustbecondensedandcollectedintothetesttubein • Apparatusmustbeopentotheatmosphere sothatthere isnobuildup • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • Objectives distinguish unknowns. using boilingpointsto Draw conclusions points oftwoliquids. to determinetheboiling Record flames. the icebath. of gaspressure. temperature data about 5. 4. 3. substances tobedifferent? What two variables causetheboilingpointsof Define kinetic energy ofaliquid? What effect doestheadditionofheathave onthe aeClass Date test tubes(2) ring standand hot plate boiling chips ice (150mL) 250-mL beakers(2) Materials clamp boiling point . plastic orrubber 2-hole rubber thermometer unknown liquids • Chapter13 length) tubing (60-cm stopper Section 13.4 Use with 101 102 2. 1. Data andObservations 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure Name LAB and B. Your teacherwillmake atablewiththedatacollected byallthegroupsforunknowns A Record theboilingpointofyourunknown liquidin cool beforehandling. Turn off thehotplate. Allow theequipmentto tures tooneplaceafterthedecimalpoint. steady streamofbubbles. Recordthetempera- begins toboilin slowly. Recordtheboilingpointwhenliquid Turn onthehotplateandheatwater bath stopper. atmosphere. sure thatthisendofthetubingisopento loose endofthetubingintotesttube.Make the secondtesttubeinicebath.Insert ice ina250-mLbeaker tofill ithalffull.Place and collectinthesecondtesttube.Placeenough Assemble theicebath. The vapors willcondense stand inthewater bath. Clamp thetesttubetoring test tube. not touchingthebottomof but is submerged intheliquid, the thermometersothatbulb stopper inthetesttube. Adjust glycerol ifneeded.Placethe Lubricate thestopperwith tubing intothestopper. Insert thethermometerand beaker onthehotplate. with tapwater andplacethe Fill one250-mLbeaker halffull in Assemble theapparatusshown boiling chipstoit. teacher andaddoneortwo unknown liquidfromyour Obtain atesttubecontainingan Figure A. Chemistry: Matter andChange 13.2 ATO:Donotuse a rubber CAUTION: Data Table1. There shouldbea • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter13 clamp Stand and IHLOW HIGH Data Table1. Hot plate 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis MED OFF place. Clean andreturnalllabequipmenttoitsproper Return bothtesttubestoyourteacher. aeClass Date Thermometer Stopper LABORATORY MANUAL sample 2-ml beakers Tubing 250-ml Ice bath pressure atmospheric open to must be No stopper; Figure A

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name vrg Average Group5 Group4 Group3 Group2 Group1 Average Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 LAB nnw oln on °)UkonBBoilingpoint(°C) UnknownB Boilingpoint(°C) Unknown A the difference betweentheacceptedboilingpointsofliquids? B withthereferencedataprovided byyourteacher. Identifytheunknown liquids. What is Comparing andContrasting average. discardthatdataandrecalculatethe differ fromtheaverage bymorethan2degrees, and unknown B.Use atleastthreetemperaturesinyourcalculations.Ifany datapoints Acquiring and Analyzing Data Applying Concepts unknown liquid. Observing andInferring hypotheses? Listpossiblesourcesoferrors. boiling pointforeachsubstance. Were themeasurementsaccurateenoughtoconfirm your value andtheexperimental value forameasurement.Calculatethe errorfortheaverage Error Analysis 13.2 The errorforameasurementisthedifference betweentheaccepted What istheexternal pressureinthisexperiment? Explain thepathway ofheattransferfromthehotplateto Compare youraverage boilingpointforunknowns A and Calculate theaverage boilingpointsforunknown A Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter13 103 104 Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB (8848 mhigh)? (394 mbelow sealevel) orMt.Everest experiment was performedattheDeadSea How would theboilingpointchangeifthis Chemistry: Matter andChange 13.2 • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter13 2. cooker? What arethepotentialdangers? What istheadvantage inusingapressure Explain whathappensinapressurecooker. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Charles’s Law aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions temperature ischanged? volume ofagasifthe What isthechangein Problem Name J different temperatures. 1 gas isexpressedasCharles Mathematically, Charles constant pressure,isdirectlyproportionaltoitsKelvintemperature. expression tochangeCelsiustemperatureKelvinis:K this temperatureisexpressedas0K,orabsolutezero.Themathematical all intersectatthesametemperature, temperature-volume dataisplotted,theextrapolationsofthesegraphs produces astraightline.Ifseveraldifferent gasesarestudiedandthe the temperatureisdecreased,providedpressurekeptconstant. a linearmannerasthetemperatureisincreasedandcontractlinearly Charles’s Law indicates initialconditions,and acques Charlesfirstshowedtherelationshipbetweentemperature LAB and volumeofagasin1787.Hisworkshowedthatgasesexpand In thisactivity, youwillmeasurethevolumeofagas (air)attwo In thisexpression, The relationshipbetweenKelvintemperatureandthevolumeofa The graphicalplotofthetemperatureversusvolumeagas 14.1 LABORATORY MANUAL V ’ is thevolume, s lawis: ’ s law:Thevolumeofaconfinedgas,at Possibledangerofelectrical shockexists. • Hotobjectsmaynotappear tobehot. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles, thermalgloves,andalabapron. • • • • Objectives temperatures. of thegasatdifferent to predictthevolume Make temperature ischanged. gas shouldbewhenthe change involumeofa Calculate raised orlowered. when thetemperatureis of agaswillchange Predict 2 V T 1 1 indicates finalconditions. and how thevolume T what the 273 V T is Kelvintemperature, use graphs 2 2 ° C. TheKelvinequivalentof aeClass Date C 1000-mL beakers(2) 250-mL graduated 125-mL dropping Materials ° cylinder caps (2) hinged dispenser bottle with 273 ° . ice clamp ring stand thermometer hot plate • Chapter14 Section 14.1 Use with 105 106 Figure A Part A Procedure Pre-Lab Name 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB Figure A. asshown in that isplacedonahotplate, assembled droppingbottleina1000-mLbeaker Use aringstandandclamptosuspendthe hinged capopen. leaving the bottle. Screw thecap onto thebottle, Thoroughly cleananddrya125-mLdropping in theroom Measure andrecordthetemperatureofair test yourhypothesis. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow to your hypothesisinthenext column. change asthetemperatureischanged.Record hypothesis abouthow thevolume ofagaswill Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a convert CelsiustemperaturetoKelvin. Write themathematicalexpression usedto law. Write themathematicalexpression ofCharles’s State Charles’s law. beaker filled with water Chemistry: Matter andChange Dropping 14.1 1000-mL bottle Data Table1. IHLOW HIGH Hot plate Ring stand MED OFF Clamp • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter14 Hypothesis water insteadoftapwater. water thistimebyimmersingitinabeaker ofice onlycoolthedroppingbottleinboiling activity, Obtain acleandroppingbottle.RepeatPart A ofthis Part B 12. 11. 10. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 9. water toenterthebottle. openthehingedcapandallow submerged, 5 minutes. With thebottleandcapcompletely Leave thebottleimmersedinwater for water. changes andthenrecordthetemperatureof Stir thewater untilthetemperaturenolonger another 1000-mLbeaker containingtapwater. water. Coolthebottlebyimmersingitin immediately remove thebottlefromhot Close thehingedcapondroppingbottleand Data Table1. Record thetemperatureofboilingwater in and continueboilingforabout5minutes. Heat thewater toboiling. Then reducetheheat least 75percentofthesuspendedbottle. Pour enoughwater intothebeaker tocover at the water inthebottle. cylinder toaccuratelymeasurethevolume of fill thebottlewithwater. Usethegraduated To find thestartingvolume ofairinthebottle, the bottle. accurately measurethevolume ofthewater in ture oftapwater. Useagraduatedcylinder to the temperatureofboilingwater tothetempera- change involume oftheairasitcooledfrom The volume ofwater inthebottleisequalto right sideuponthelabdesk. Remove thebottlefromwater andplaceit in thebottleisnow at atmosphericpressure. water level inthebeaker. Closethecap. The air the water level inthebottleiseven withthe cap stillopen.Elevate orlower thebottleuntil withthe Hold thebottleinaninverted position, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Cleanup andDisposal Name 3. 2. 1. Volume of airatlowertemperature(mL) Change involumeofairbottle(mL) Total volumeofairinbottleathighertemperature(mL) Final temperatureofcoolingwater(K) Final temperatureofcoolingwater( Temperature ofboilingwater(K) Temperature ofboilingwater( Room temperature( LAB final volume. Comparing andContrasting volume ofairwhencooledintapwater. Measuring andUsingNumbers a lower temperature. Record youranswerin from thetotalvolume ofairinthebottleatahighertemperaturetogetvolume ofairat Measuring andUsingNumbers record youranswersin Measuring andUsingNumbers lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. 14.1 ° C) Data Table1. ° C) Compare theexpected final volume withthecalculated ° C) Use theequation Subtract thechangeinvolume ofairinthebottle Calculate theKelvin temperatures ofthewater and Data Table1. Data Table 1 V T 1 1 aeClass Date V T 2 2 Part A Part B Part Part A to calculatetheexpected LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter14 107 108 8. 7. 6. 5. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB c. b. a. Making andUsingGraphs of thegasinbottleiftemperatureairwas reducedtothattemperature. Predicting water level inthebottleiseven withthewater level inthebeaker? Thinking Critically extrapolation andtheactualextrapolated linetemperature. Error Analysis xli h ra ie hnbkd Hn:TheactionofyeastproducesCO Explain whybreadriseswhenbaked. (Hint: Explain whybottledgascontainersareequippedwithareliefvalve. Extrapolate theline. At whichtemperaturedidthelineactuallycross At whichtemperatureisthelinepredictedtocross andinicewater onthe water, intap Construct agraphofthedata.Plotvolume ofthegasatroomtemperature, Chemistry: Matter andChange 14.1 Dry icesublimes(changesfromsolidtogas)at Account forany deviation betweenthepredictedtemperatureline What isthesignificance ofelevating orlowering thebottle untilthe y -axis. PlottheKelvin temperaturesonthe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter14 x -axis? x -axis? aeClass Date 85 C.Predictthevolume 78.5¡ LABORATORY MANUAL x -axis. 2 gas.)

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. B Boyle’s Law aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual pressures? compare atdifferent of pressuretimesvolume how doestheproduct a constanttemperature, For asampleofgasat Problem Name relationship maybeexpressedas increases, themagnitudeofsecondquantitydecreases.This variation. Inaninverserelationship,asthemagnitudeofonequantity sample ofgasresultsinadoublingthevolume. reduces thevolumebyone-half.Conversely, halvingthepressureona a constanttemperature,doublingthepressureonsampleofgas provided thetemperaturedoesnotchange.Ithasbeenobservedthat,at are highlytoxicandcannotbesafelyusedintheclassroomlaboratory. Water isusedinsteadofmercurybecauseliquidanditsvapors mm Hg,ortorr, bydividingthewatercolumnheight,inmm,13.6. is 13.6timesasdensewater, anycolumnofwatercanbeconvertedto or subtractedfromthecorrectedpressureforeachcase.Becausemercury above andbelowtheinitialpointmustbecalculatedeitheraddedto vapor pressureatthetemperatureofwaterbeingusedinactivity. product ofpressureandvolumeisaconstant,or, consult the pressure mustbesubtractedfromthebarometricpressure.You will water vaporwillsaturateandaddtothepressure.So, where pressure, and Boyle’s Law LAB The graphicalplotofpressureversusvolumeshowsaninverse Additionally, thepressureequivalentofheights ofthewater The procedureinthislabisdoneusinganairsampleoverwater, and oyle constant temperatureisinverselyproportionaltothepressure, P 1 ’ s lawstatesthatthevolumeofafixedamountgasat is theinitialpressure, 14.2 CRC HandbookofChemistryandPhysics V 2 is thesecondvolume.Notethatinthisrelationship, LABORATORY MANUAL • • • Objectives constant temperature. different pressuresand pressure andvolumeat Compare and volume. the productofpressure corrected pressuresand Use numbers varies. gas (air)asthepressure Measure P V 1 1 V PV is theinitialvolume, 1 P the volumeofa k the productof 2 V 2 to calculate to determinewater P 2 aeClass Date is thesecond leveling bulb eudiometer tube barometer stirring rod thermometer graduated cylinder 1000-mL beakers(2) Materials meterstick CRC Handbookof heavy-walled • Chapter14 Physics Chemistry and rubber tubing Section 14.1 Use with 109 110 10. Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB Figure A. asshown in Reassemble theapparatus, water andthenreconnect therubbertubing. Fill theeudiometertubeabout one-thirdfullof Place yourfinger over theendoftube. tubing untiltheairiscompletelyremoved. and allow water to run throughtherubber Disconnect thetubingfromeudiometertube the bulb. Pour enoughwater intotheleveling bulb tofill Assemble theapparatusasshown in Table 1. Record thetemperatureofwater in use thethermometerasastirringrod. Stir thewater slowly for2minutes.DoNOT the water issaturatedwithair. between two 1000-mLbeakers toensurethat Pour thewater vigorouslyseveral times Pour thiswater intoa1000-mLbeaker. room. until itmeasuresthesametemperatureas heatorcoolit it isnotatroomtemperature, Obtain 500mLofwater atroomtemperature.If your hypothesisonpage111. change asthetemperatureischanged.Record hypothesis abouthow thevolume ofagaswill Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a ence inheightsby13.6. point mustbecalculatedbydividing thediffer- heights ofthewater above andbelow theinitial Explain whythepressureequivalent ofthe subtracted fromthebarometricpressure. Explain whywater vapor pressuremustbe law. Write themathematicalexpression ofBoyle’s State Boyle’s law inwords. Chemistry: Matter andChange 14.2 Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter14 Figure A. Data Leveling Figure A 17. 16. 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. bulb Ring in theeudiometer. of water inthebulb is 500mmbelow the water Lower theleveling bulb farther so thatthelevel in Record thevolume ofairintheeudiometertube below thewater in the eudiometer. that thelevel ofwater inthebulb is250mm lower theleveling bulb so Using themeterstick, in Record thevolume ofairintheeudiometertube Table 1. Record thecurrentbarometricpressurein the bulb arethesame. tube sothatthelevels ofwater inthetubeand Adjust theleveling bulb andtheeudiometer connections andtightenasneeded. checkthe constant rate.Ifleaksarepresent, level intheeudiometershouldchangeata thewater leveling bulb. Iftherearenoleaks, Check forleaksbyraisingandlowering the aeClass Date Data Table2. Data Table2. LABORATORY MANUAL Eudiometer Clamp Rubber tubing Ring stand Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 22. 21. 20. 19. 18. Name 3. 2. 1. Water levels Vapor pressure ofwateratcurrentroomtemperature(torr) Barometric pressure(torr) Water temperature(room temperaturein Bulb is500mmabove Bulb is250mmabove Bulb is500mmbelow Bulb is250mmbelow Levels equal LAB in thetube. of water inthebulb is500mmabove thewater Raise theleveling bulb farther sothatthelevel in Record thevolume ofairintheeudiometertube the tube. in thebulb is250mmmeterabove thewater in Raise theleveling bulb sothatthelevel ofwater in Record thevolume ofairintheeudiometertube are thesame.Recordyour answerin late thepressureofdry airwhenthelevels ofthewater intheleveling bulb andtube Measuring andUsingNumbers answers in height ofthewater columnbyraisingandlowering theleveling bulb. Recordyour Measuring andUsingNumbers Making andUsing Tables in Record thevolume ofairintheeudiometertube equal.) the answerin up water vapor pressure atthetemperatureofwater beingusedin the activity. Record Data Table2. Data Table2. Data Table2. 14.2 Data Table2. Data Table1. oueo i m) geuvln f Corrected pressure Hgequivalentof Volume ofair(mL) (You willnothave anequivalent value whenthelevels are Use the V Using thepressuredatafrom Calculate themercuryequivalent ofchangingthe Data Table2. ° CRC HandbookofChemistryandPhysics C) Data Table 1 Data Table 2 ae oun(or ofdryair(torr) water column(torr) — Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 3. 2. 1. laboratory. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table1, to look calcu- P • Chapter14 PV (torr for drygas mL) 111 112 11. 10. Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB sure increases? Acquiring and Analyzing Data Predicting the bulb was 1meterbelow thewater level inthetube?Explain. Predicting Thinking Critically each stepby13.6? Thinking Critically Measuring andUsingNumbers point. Recordyouranswersin adding thepressureequivalent oftheheights ofthewater above andbelow theinitial position oftheleveling bulb byusingthiscorrectedpressureofdryairandsubtractingor Measuring andUsingNumbers for eachofthesetsdata.Recordyouranswersin the temperatureremainsconstant.) gas at760torrto1literof gas.(Assume would beneededtocompress 4litersof Compute theamountofpressure that Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 14.2 At whichpressureswould thevolume ofthegas belessthantheoriginalvolume? What would bethevalue of Compare the What isthesignificance ofsubtractingwater vapor pressureineachstep? What isthesignificance ofdividing thewater level difference in Data Table2. PV • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter14 What happenstothevolume ofthegasaspres- Use therelationship Calculate thecorrectedpressureofdryairforeach dataforeachtrial. Account forany discrepancies. k PV if thebulb was lowered sothatthewater in Data Table2. 2. hold theirbreathwhileascending inwater. Explain whySCUBA divers aretaught tonot PV aeClass Date tocalculatetheconstant k LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Making aSolubilityCurve aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions salt? solubility curveforagiven How doyoudeterminethe Problem Name at different temperaturesandwillplotasolubilitycurveforthesolute. temperatures. Inthisactivity, youwilldeterminethe solubilityofasalt lower temperaturescannotdissolveasmuchsolutesolventsathigher solute. specific temperatureandpressureisdefinedasthesolubilityof amount ofsolutethatcanbedissolvedinagivensolventat will collectonthebottomofcontainerandremainundissolved.The additional solute,thesolutionissaturated.Anysoluteadded solution isunsaturated.Whenthesolventcannolongerdissolve more solute.Aslongasthesolventisabletodissolvesolute, being formed,thesolventhasanever-decreasing abilitytodissolve amount ofsolute.Assoluteisaddedtoasolventandthesolution A Making aSolubilityCurve the freezingice-water bath? Why isamixtureoficeand water usedtomake saturated? How willyouknow whenthesolutionis LAB Solubility isdependentupontemperature.Generally, solventsat solution isahomogeneousmixtureofsoluteinsolvent. Solvents, however, areonlyabletodissolve(solvate)alimited 15.1 LABORATORY MANUAL Usecautionaround hotitems. • Nevertasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • Objectives changing temperature. solubility changeswith and function oftemperature Graph solution inicewater. Prepare observe solubility asa a saturated how the 4. 3. hypothesis onpage114. when asaturatedsolutionis heated.Recordyour Hypothesize whatwillhappen tothesolubility Read over theentire laboratoryactivity. order tomake asolubilitycurve? Why mustasaturatedsolutionbeobtainedin aeClass Date 100-mL graduated 400-mL beakers(2) distilled water ammonium potassium chloride sodium chloride Materials lithium sulfate cylinder chloride (NH (KCl) (NaCl) (Li 2 SO 4 ) 4 Cl) graph paper metal panfilled watch glass weighing papers(4) balance stirring rod scoop hot plate thermometer • Chapter15 (2 sheets) with ice Section 15.1 Use with 113 114 Procedure Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB a constant20¡Ctemperature. beaker fromthehotplateasneededtomaintain solution to20¡C.Remove andreplacethe heatthe ture ofthesolutioninbeaker, Using thethermometertomeasuretempera- towel. Placethebeaker onthehotplate. dry theoutsideofbeaker withapaper Remove thebeaker formthepanandcarefully solution in amount ofsaltaddedtomake thesaturated remain onthebottomofbeaker. Recordthe added tothewater. Any excess solidwill sure tokeep trackofthetotalmasssalt dissolve. The solutionisnow saturated.Make Repeat step6untilnomoreofthesaltwill the mixtureuntilsolidisdissolved. salt andaddittothewater inthebeaker. Stir measure5.0goftheselected Using thebalance, water. Record thetemperaturein mometer tomeasurethetemperatureof breaker withadditionalice.Usethether- beaker inapancontainingice.Surroundthe second beaker in Record thevolume ofthecoldwater inthe to thenew beaker. addmoreice.Donottransferany ice reached, the icemeltsbefore0¡Ctemperatureis cold water intoasecond400-mLbeaker. Ifall Place awatch glassover thebeaker. Pourthe remove thethermometerandstirringrod. When thetemperatureisaconstant0¡C, mometer tostirthemixture. the mixture. the thermometertomeasuretemperatureof thenuse the iceandwater mixturefor1minute, ice tothebeaker andinsertthestirringrod.Stir measure100gofice. Add the Using abalance, water intoa400-mLbeaker. measure200mLof Using agraduatedcylinder, identity in Select oneofthefoursaltstotestandrecordits Chemistry: Matter andChange 15.1 Data Table1. Data Table1. ATO:Donotusethether- CAUTION: Data Table1. Place the Data Table1. • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter15 13. 12. 11. 10. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. family ofsolubilitycurves. salts. Graphthisdataonyourgraphtoobtaina groups inyourclassfortheremainingthree obtainsolubilitydatafromtheother teacher, through thedatapoints. With thehelp of your temperature. Draw abest-fit smoothcurve Plot agraphofthemasssaltdissolved versus gently setitonthelabbenchtocool. Remove thebeaker fromthehotplateand and 80¡C. Repeat steps9and10attemperaturesof50¡C saturated solutionin Record theamountofsolidaddedtomake the solid willremainonthebottomofbeaker. The solutionissaturatedagain. Any excess until nomoresolidwilldissolve inthewater. Continue addingthesaltat5.0-gincrements to thewater. Stiruntilthesaltdissolves. addanother5.0gofthesalt solution dissolves, When theundissolved solidfromthesaturated Clean upyourwork area. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. waste containers. Place allchemicalsinappropriatelylabeled emptying thecontents. Make sureallglassware iscoolbefore Turn off thehotplateandallow ittocool. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL ATO:Thebeaker ishot. CAUTION: Data Table1.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name eprtr °)Massofsaltaddedtomakeasaturated solution(g) Temperature (°C) LAB was added? Thinking Critically temperatures above 80¡C? Predicting temperature dependent? Comparing andContrasting increased? Observing andInferring 15.1 What would happentothesolubilityofeachsaltifitwas testedat Why was theexcess iceremoved fromthewater beforeany salt What happenedtothesolubilityofsaltastemperature The solubilityofwhichthefoursaltsismost Data Table 1 Identity ofsalt aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter15 115 116 5. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB Explain possiblereasonsforany disagreement. Error Analysis water inadishwasher ratherthancoldwater. very hot.Explainwhyitisbettertousehot thetemperatureofwater is In adishwasher, Chemistry: Matter andChange 15.1 Compare theresultsofthislabwithpredictionsyourhypothesis. • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter15 2. heat acancontainingcarbonatedsoftdrink. explain whyyoushouldnever Knowing this, decreases asthetemperatureincreases. thesolubilityofagasinliquidusually ture, generally increaseswithincreasingtempera- Unlike solidsforwhichsolubilityinaliquid aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

LAB 15.2 LABORATORY MANUAL

Use with FreezingFreezing PointPoint DepressionDepression Section 15.3

issolving a solute in a solvent changes several properties of the D solvent, including the freezing point, the boiling point, and the vapor pressure. These changes in the physical properties of a solvent by the addition of a solute are known collectively as colligative properties. In this activity, the colligative property of freezing point depression will be investigated.

Problem Objectives Materials What is the freezing point • Make and use graphs to naphthalene thermometer depression constant of find the freezing point of 1,4-dichlorobenzene stirring wire naphthalene? naphthalene. acetone tripod stand and • Measure and use numbers 600-mL beaker gauze to determine the freezing hot plate beaker tongs point depression constant large test tube with balance of naphthalene. two-hole rubber test-tube clamp stopper Safety Precautions • Always wear safety goggles, a lab apron, and gloves. • Avoid breathing in chemical vapors. • Dispose of chemicals as instructed by your teacher. • Acetone is flammable. It is slightly toxic by ingestion and inhalation. • Naphthalene is moderately toxic by ingestion, inhalation, and skin contact. • 1,4-dichlorobenzene is a severe irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory tract and mildly toxic by ingestion. Pre-Lab

The freezing point depression constant, Kf , is 2. The density of water is 1.0 kg/L. What is the given by mass, in kg, of 250 mL of water? Tf Kf m 3. What is the molal concentration, m, in mol/kg, of where Tf change in freezing point in ¡C, a solution of 5.0 g of caffeine in 250 mL of Kf is the freezing point depression constant in water? ¡Ckg/mol, and m is the molal concentration in 4. The solution in question 3 freezes at 0.192¡C. mol/kg. Because water normally freezes at 0¡C, this means that the freezing point has decreased by 1. Read over the entire laboratory activity. Use the 0.192¡C. Thus, T 0.192¡C. What is the Copyright ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. periodic table in your textbook to answer the f freezing point depression constant of water, K ? following questions. f a. What is the molar mass of caffeine (C8H10N4O2) in g/mol? b. How many moles of caffeine are there in 5.00 g of caffeine?

Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 15 117 118 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Part A Procedure Name LAB temperature isconstantthroughout. the naphthaleneasitcools toensurethatthe of thenaphthaleneasitcools. Continuestirring tube clampmaybehot. no longerover thebeaker. by repositioningthetest-tubeclampsothatitis Remove thetesttubefromboilingwater bath naphthalene hasmelted. naphthalene asitisbeingheateduntilallofthe down tostirthecontentsoftesttube.Stir the thermometer. Move thestirringwireupand naphthalene. The stirringwireshouldlooparound hot. the testtube. insert therubberstopperassemblyintotopof boiling water. When thenaphthalenehasmelted, the naphthaleneisbelow thesurface ofthe cally intheboilingwater bath.Make sureallof Use thetest-tubeclamptoholdtesttubeverti- the value in Calculate themassofnaphthaleneandrecord thalene andrecordthevalue in Measure themassoftesttubeandnaph- Add about10gofnaphthalenetothetesttube. 0.01g andrecordthevalue in Measure themassoftesttubetonearest aside. rubber stopper. Settherubberstopperassembly Insert thestirringwireinsecondholeof askyour teacherfor help. difficulty, as itmayshatterinyour hand.Ifyou have any into thestopper. Donotforce thethermometer, with glycerol orsoapywaterbefore insertingit sure tolubricatetheendofthermometer Follow thedirections carefully. Be CAUTION: one oftheholesinrubberstopper. thermometer. Inserttheglassthermometerinto the beginning ofthismanualbeforeinsertingthe Read thedirectionsinLaboratory Techniques at can causeburns. Thehotplateandboilingwater CAUTION: heatthewater untilitboils. Using ahotplate, Add about400mLofwater toa600-mLbeaker. The thermometershouldbeimmersedinthe Chemistry: Matter andChange 15.2 Data Table1. ATO:Thetesttubemaybe CAUTION: Monitor thetemperature ATO:Thetest- CAUTION: Data Table1. Data Table1. • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter15 1. 9. 8. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. Part B washing themwithacetone. andstirrerby thermometer, lene fromthestopper, discard thenaphthalene.Remove allthenaphtha- andtesttubemaybehot. ring wire, as aunit. and youcanremove thethermometerandstirrer Heat thetesttubeuntilnaphthaleneismelted partially submerged intheboiling water bath. tube containingthesolidnaphthaleneisagain Reposition thetest-tubeclampsothattest 70¡C. ments oncethetemperaturehasdroppedbelow naphthalene hasfrozen.Stopmakingmeasure- continue recordingthetemperatureeven afterthe above andbelow thefreezingpoint. Thus, thecoolingcurve mustbeobserved both rately, In ordertodeterminethefreezingpointaccu- tures tothenearest0.1¡C. measurements every 30s.Recordalltempera- ture of90.0¡Catanelapsedtime0sec. Take first entryin time andthetemperaturein begin recordingtheelapsed has fallen to90.0¡C, When thetemperatureofmoltennaphthalene Clean upyourlabareaand wash yourhands. teacher’s directions. Dispose ofthechemicalsaccording toyour steps6through9. Repeat Part A, steps2and3. Repeat Part A, stirrer aredryandfreeofacetone. and thermometer, Make surethatthestopper, these values in dichlorobenzene thathasbeenadded.Record andcalculatethemassof1,4- contents, tube. Measurethemassoftesttubeandits Add about1gof1,4-dichlorobenzenetothetest Data Table1. remaining inthetesttube.Recordthesevalues in lene againandcalculatethemassofnaphthalene Measure themassoftesttubeandnaphtha- aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL ATO:Tetemmtr stir- Thethermometer, CAUTION: Data Table2 Data Table1. will bethetempera- Data Table2. Do not The

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations Name lpe ie()Pr eprtr °)Part Btemperature (°C) Part A temperature (°C) Elapsed time(s) Mass oftesttube,naphthalene,and1,4-dichlorobenzene(g) Mass ofnaphthalene(g) Mass oftesttubeandnaphthalene(g) Mass oftesttube(g) LAB naphthalene-1,4-dichlorobenzene solutiononthelinebelow. freezing pointofthesolutioninPart B.Recordyourestimateforthefreezingpointof determinethe Following theinstructionsinquestion 2, 1,4-dichlorobenzene Solution.” Do notconnectthedatapoints.Labelthisgraph“Cooling Curve ofNaphthaleneand time ( constructatemperature( Using graphpaperandyourdatafromPart B, Record yourestimateforthefreezingpointofnaphthalene onthelinebelow. at whichyourbestfit linesintersectyieldanestimate forthefreezingpointofnaphthalene. data points.Draw abest fit straightlinethroughthedatapointsineachregion. The points regions aredistinguishedbyachangeintheslopeoflinethatwould passthroughthe The graphfromquestion1shouldshow two orpossiblythreedistinctregions. These this graph“CoolingCurve ofPureNaphthalene.” ( constructatemperature( Using graphpaperandyourdatafromPart A, x -axis) graphforthecoolingofnaphthalene.Donotconnectdatapoints.Label 210 180 150 120 90 60 30 x 90.0 0 15.2 -axis) graphforthecoolingofnaphthalene-1,4-dichlorobenzene solution. Data Table 2 ° 90.0 C Data Table 1 aeClass Date ° C LABORATORY MANUAL Part A Part B Part Part A — y y -axis) versus -axis) versus time • Chapter15 119 120 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB affected theresults. actual values. Listseveral possiblesourcesoferrorandexplain how they mayhave d. c. b. a. Measuring andUsingNumbers Error Analysis with water inacar’s radiatorduringthewinter? Why isitimportanttohave antifreezemixed freezing pointdepressionconstant, these two temperaturesbythemolalconcentrationof1,4-dichlorobenzenetoobtain Label thefreezingpointofpurenaphthalenefromPart A, What was themolalconcentrationof1,4-dichlorobenzeneinnaphthalene? The chemicalformulafor1,4-dichlorobenzeneisC usedinPart B? inkilograms, What was themassofnaphthalene, 1,4-dichlorobenzene? of the1,4-dichlorobenzenesolutionfromPart B, Chemistry: Matter andChange 15.2 Compare thefreezingpointdepressionvalues youcalculatedtothe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter15 K f fornaphthalene. , T B 2. 6 . Divide thedifference between H 4 prevent theformationofice. Explain how saltinga roadinthewinterhelps C l2 aeClass Date . What isthemolarmassof T A . Labelthefreezingpoint LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Heats ofSolutionandReaction aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual process? reactions andthesolution change duringchemical How dotemperatures Problem Name sodium hydroxide(NaOH)absorbsorliberatesheat. determine whetherthereactionofhydrochloricacid(HCl)with change isthereactionofanacidandabase.Inthisactivity, youwill is lessthantheenergyreleasedwhenionsattachtowater. The reactionisexothermiciftheenergyneededtobreakbonds greater thantheenergyreleasedwhenionsattachtowater. process isendothermiciftheenergyneededtobreakbonds water moleculesandbecomehydrated,energyisreleased.The to breaktheionicbondsofcrystal.Asionsattach when concentratedsulfuricacid(H heat ofreaction. investigate twoexamplesofheatsolutionandoneexample released whennewbondsareformed.Inthisactivity, youwill between theenergyabsorbedtobreakbondsand released duringthesolutionprocess.Botharedifference reaction. Heatofsolutionistheoverallenergyabsorbedor is theoverallenergyabsorbedorreleasedduringachemical (NH second isthedissolvingofioniccompoundammoniumchloride Heats ofSolutionandReaction LAB An exampleofachemicalreactionwithmeasurableenergy When anioniccompounddissolvesinwater, energyisneeded The firstexampleofheatsolutionisthetransferred 4 chemical reactionsandthedissolvingprocess.Heatofreaction wo typesofprocessescommonlyinvolveenergychanges Cl) inwater. 16.1 LABORATORY MANUAL • • Objectives endothermic processes. exothermic and Differentiate processes. changes ofdifferent Measure 2 SO 4 the temperature ) isaddedtowater. The between aeClass Date 18 1 1 ammonium chloride Materials M M (H hydroxide (NaOH) acid (HCl) (NH — M sodium hydrochloric 2 SO sulfuric acid 4 Cl) 4 ) stirring rod timer balance thermometer plastic-foam cups(3) 100-mL graduated 10-mL graduated • Chapter16 cylinder cylinder Section 16.3 Use with 121 122 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. HeatofSolutionforSulfuric Acid Part A: Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name Safety Precautions LAB teacher. Dispose oftheacidsolution asdirectedbyyour attained. Measure andrecordthehighesttemperature H Use agraduatedcylinder tomeasure8.0mL Record thisinitialtemperaturein readthetemperature ofthewater. After 2min, Insert athermometerintothewater inthecup. foam cup. Measure 45mLofwater. Pourthewater intoa place. system inwhichanexothermic processistaking Describe theanticipatedtemperaturechangeofa your hypothesis. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow totest hypothesis onpage123. and endothermicprocesses.Recordyour hypothesis abouthow todistinguishexothermic Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a processes. Distinguish betweenexothermic andendothermic Define stir thesolutionwithastirringrod. in thefoamcup.Cautiouslywithoutsplashing, 2 SO Chemistry: Matter andChange 4 16.1 . CarefullypourtheH heat ofreaction . 2 Foamcupscanbeeasilypunctured, causingachemicalspill. • Mercury from mercury-based thermometersistoxic. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • Ammoniumchlorideisslightlytoxic. • Sodiumhydroxide istoxic andcorrosive toskin. • Dangerous spattering can result whendilutingconcentratedacids. • Sulfuricandhydrochloric acidsare toxicandcorrosive toskinandreact • Solutionsmaybecomeveryhotorcold.Usecautionwhen • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • SO Remember toaddacidwater, neverwatertoacid. with metals. handling. 4 Data Table1. into thewater • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter16 Chloride HeatofSolutionfor Ammonium Part B: 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. atC HeatofReaction Part C: foam cup. Measure 30mLofwater. Pourthewater intoa teacher. Dispose ofthesolutionas directed byyour Measure andrecordthenew temperatureattained. with acleanstirringrod. stirthesolution Cautiously withoutsplashing, (NaOH) solutionintotheacidinfoamcup. 1 Use agraduatedcylinder tomeasure10mLof this initialtemperaturein readthetemperatureof acid. Record 2 min, Insert athermometerintothecupofacid. After 1 Use agraduatedcylinder tomeasure20mLof teacher. Dispose ofthesolutionasdirectedbyyour attained. Measure andrecordthelowest temperature Measure 5gofammoniumchloride(NH this initialtemperaturein readthetemperatureofwater. Record 2 min, Insert athermometerintothecupofwater. After stirring rod. stirthesolutionwithaclean without splashing, paper intothewater inthefoamcup.Cautiously pour theammoniumchloridefromweighing crystals onapieceofweighingpaper. Carefully M M aeClass Date NaOH. Carefullypourthesodiumhydroxide HCl. Pourtheacidintoafoamcup. LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table3. Data Table2. 4 Cl)

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Hypothesis Name Exothermic orendothermic? Temperature change( Water temperatureafter addingH Initial watertemperature( Exothermic orendothermic? Temperature change( Temperature afteraddingNaOH( Initial acidtemperature( Exothermic orendothermic? Temperature change( Water temperatureafter addingNH Initial watertemperature( LAB 16.1 atB HeatofSolutionfor Ammonium Chloride Part B: ° ° ° atA HeatofSolutionforSulfuric Acid Part A: C) C) C) ° C) ° ° C) C) atC HeatofReaction Part C: Data Table 3 Data Table 2 Data Table 1 ° 2 C) SO 4 Cl ( 4 ( ° ° C) C) 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal detergent beforeleaving thelab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlywithsoapor Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyourteacher. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter16 123 124 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB being releasedastheionsattachtowater. Explain how youmight concludethatmoreenergy isbeingusedtobreakbondsthan energy isreleased. crystal. As theionsattachtowater moleculesandbecomehydrated, Drawing Conclusions amount ofwater but lesssulfuricacidhadbeen used?Explain. Making aPrediction tion isexothermic orendothermic? Interpreting Data three reactions? Observing andInferring three processes. Using Numbers Explain. amounts ofreactantsandthetemperaturesbemeasured withaccuracy andprecision? Error Analysis reaction isoftenusedtodo usefulwork. Explain how theheatenergy fromthistypeof Combustion offuelsis anexothermic reaction. works. gency orsportsmedicine, oftenusedinemer- Explain how a“coldpack,” Chemistry: Matter andChange 16.1 Calculate andrecordinthedatatablestemperaturechangesof ots orhptei nti ciiy was itimportantthatthe To testyourhypothesisinthisactivity, What istheexperimental evidence thatindicateswhethereachreac- Would thetemperaturechangeinPart A bedifferent ifthesame nPr ,energy isneededtobreaktheionicbondsof In Part B, What observation allowed youtocompare theheatflow inthe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter16 3. endothermic chemicalreaction. condition ahomeorbusiness byusingan Explain whyitwould notbepracticaltoair- aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Candle Wax Heat ofCombustion aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual candle wax? heat ofcombustion candle andcalculatethe heat releasedbyaburning How canyoumeasurethe Problem Name quantity ofheatincalories following relationship: heat releasedbytheburningcandleusing temperature, youcancalculatetheamountof mass ofthewater, andtheincreasein of water. Usingthespecificheatofwater, the burning candlewillheatameasuredquantity of combustionthefuelinacandle.The provided inthetable. Some additionalheatsofcombustionare follows. heat isthejoule.Onejouleequalto4.184calories. temperature ofonegramwaterdegreeCelsius.TheSIunit joules (J).Acalorieistheamountofheatneededtoraise The amountofheatreleasedmaybemeasuredincalories(cal)or the molarmassofcandlewaxtoobtainheatcombustion( the quantityofheatreleasedpergramcandlewaxandmultiplyby in kJ/mol. where thespecificheatofwateris1cal/(g Candle Wax Heat ofCombustion LAB In thisactivity, youwillcalculatetheheat If asampleofpurecarbonisburnedinoxygen,thereactionas mole ofasubstanceisdefinedastheheatcombustion, he amountofheatreleasedbythecompletecombustionone (mass ofwater)(changetemperature)(specificheatwater), 16.2 C(s) LABORATORY MANUAL O 2 (g) 0 • • • Objectives reaction. tant duringacombustion released permoleofreac- Calculate combustion reaction. heat releasedduringa Calculate tion reaction. water duringacombus- temperature ofamass Measure CO 2 (g) the changein H the energy the amountof comb ° C). You canthencalculate 393.5 kJ uae()C C Butane (g) CH Propane (g) Formula Methane (g) Substance cae()C Octane (l) aeClass Date metric ruler felt-tip marker balance thermometer 1/2-in. steelnuts(4) large metalcan small metalcan candle Materials H Heats ofCombustion comb H comb 8 4 . 3 H H H 18 10 4 8 ) glass stirringrod thermometer clamp ring ring stand disposable butane paper clips(3) • Chapter16 lighter ormatches H comb 5450.8 3536.1 2219.9 890.3 Section 16.3 (kJ/mol) Use with 125 126 Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name 8. 7. 6. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. LAB of thecanand thewater. Measure andrecordin water. Fill thecanapproximately halffullofdistilled can andrecordthisvalue in Unhook thesmallcan.Measuremassof 4 or5cmabove thetopofunlightedcandle. and adjusttheringsothatbottomofcanis Position thecandleassemblyundersmallcan to attachthesmallcanring. in theshapeofanS-hook.Usepaperclips Unbend threepaperclipssothatthey areeach Refer to record thisvalue in Determine themassofcandleandlid of thecandlewax. Use amarker toplacealine3cmbelow thetop while thewax isliquidandblow outthecandle. wax ontoacanlid. Attach thecandletolid Light acandleanddripfew dropsofmolten your hypothesisonpage127. heat releasedinachemicalreaction.Record hypothesis abouthow tomeasuretheamountof Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a molar massofthesubstance. andthe themassofsubstanceburned, released, combustion ifyouknow thenumberofcalories Explain how youcan calculatetheheatof reaction? endothermic reaction? An What isthesignof Define exothermic andendothermicreactions. andspecific heat. temperature, changeof massofwater, joules and(b)calories, State therelationshipbetween(a)caloriesand Define Chemistry: Matter andChange 16.2 heat ofcombustion Figure A as yousetuptheapparatus. Data Table1. H Data Table1 for anexothermic and Mercury from mercury-based thermometersistoxic. • Openflamesmayigniteclothingorhair. • Hotobjectsmaynotappeartobehot. • Disposeofwaxwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • Data Table1. calorie • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter16 the mass . 17. 16. 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. 10. Figure A Small metalcan 9. Thermometer marker line 5cmbelow thetopofcandle. except this timemake the Repeat steps2to16, of thecandleassembly. Measure andrecordin the final temperatureof thewater. Blow outthecandleandrecordin consumed tothe3-cmmarkmadeinstep2. Continue toburn thecandleuntilwax is water withaglassstirringrod. gentlystirthe While thecandleheatswater, its previous position. Immediately replacethesmallcanandwater in candle. Data Table1. Record theinitialtemperatureofwater in the can. tion ofthecandletoenteraroundbase can. This willallow airneededforthecombus- and insertthefournutsevenly spacedunderthe Raise thelarge canoff thebaseofringstand Place thelarge canover thecandle. Nut aeClass Date Wax Water LABORATORY MANUAL Use abutane lightertolightthe Data Table1 Paper clip Ring Large metalcan Thermometer clamp Ring stand Data Table1 the mass

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 3. 2. 1. Data andObservations Hypothesis Name Temperature changeofwater( Initial temperatureofwater( Final temperatureofwater( Mass ofwater(g) Mass ofemptysmallcan(g) Mass ofsmallcanandwater(g) Mass ofcandleburned(g) Final massofcandleassembly(g) Initial massofcandleassembly(g) LAB candle wax. Measuring andUsingNumbers the water usedineachtrial. Measuring andUsingNumbers Calculate thetemperaturechangeofwater foreachtrial. Calculate andrecordin Calculate andrecordin 16.2 Data Table1 Data Table1 ° C) ° C) ° C) o ahtil calculatetheheatreleasedpergramof For eachtrial, Calculate thenumberofcaloriesheatabsorbedby the massofwater usedineachtrial. the massofcandleburned ineachtrial. Data Table 1 ra 3c)Trial 2(5cm) Trial 1(3cm) 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal the lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter16 127 128 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB Thinking Critically the tableonpage125.Explainany trendyouobserve. Drawing aConclusion kilojoules permoleforeachtrial. What isthe Measuring andUsingNumbers per moleofC Measuring andUsingNumbers (C Applying Concepts C Measuring andUsingNumbers Error Analysis 32 equipment. and matchesaspartofemergency survival traveling bycarin cold climatescarryacandle Explain whyitisrecommendedthatpeople 32 H H 66 Chemistry: Matter andChange 66 16.2 . Calculatethemolarmassofwax. ). 32 H 66 Explain possiblesourcesoferrorinthisactivity. for eachtrial. Why weretwo trialsperformed? Write theequationforcombustion ofonemolecandlewax Compare theheatofcombustion youobtainedwiththevalues in • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter16 Assume thattheformulaforwax inthecandleis Convert thenumberofkilocaloriespermoleto Calculate thenumberofkilocaloriesheatreleased H comb 2. for candlewax inkJ/mol? molecules thatmake up gasoline? ascomparedtothe molecules ofdieselfuel, What doesthisimplyabout thenatureof produces moreheatperliter thandoesgasoline. and heavy equipmentbecausethedieselfuel Diesel enginesareoftenusedinlarge trucks aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. The RateofaReaction aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions rate? concentration andreaction relationship between reaction rate?Whatisthe between temperatureand What istherelationship Problem Name hydrochloric acid(HCl). given amountofmagnesium(Mg)toreactcompletelywith reaction ratewillbecalculatedfromtheamountoftimeittakesfora a reactantorproductinunitamountoftime.Inthisactivity, the chemical reactionisoftenexpressedasthechangeinconcentrationof A The RateofaReaction your hypotheses. Summarize theprocedures youwillfollow totest page 130. affect reactionrate.Recordyourhypotheseson esis abouthow anincreaseinconcentrationwill will affect reactionrate.Form asecondhypoth- hypothesis abouthow anincreaseintemperature Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a variables? What factor isheldconstant? What arethe mine theaverage rate ofachemicalreaction. Write themathematicalequationusedtodeter- Define LAB chemical equationshowsthatasareactiontakesplace, reactants arechangedintoproducts.Thereactionrateofa reaction rate 17.1 . LABORATORY MANUAL Openflamesmayignitehairorlooseclothing. • Hydrochloric acidistoxic,corrosive toskin,andreacts withmetals. • Hotobjectsmaynotappeartobehot. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • • • • Objectives and concentrations. and variedtemperatures between reactionrates Infer Graph under varyingconditions. react completelywithHCl strip ofMgribbonto time ittakesforauniform Measure the relationships the data. the amountof 4. 3. 2. 1. of Temperature Effect Part A: paper. Cuttheribbon into3.0-cmpieces. Clean a30-cmstripofmagnesiumribbonwithsand- Procedure a pieceofmagnesiumribbon intotheacid.Use Remove thethermometer fromtheacidandplace and recorditinthe Wait 3min. Measurethetemperatureofacid contains 150mLoficewater. Place thetesttubeina250-mLbeaker that drytesttube. clean, Pour 10mLof1.0 aeClass Date 10-mL graduated 250-mL beakers(4) test tubes(8) ice 3 1 sandpaper magnesium ribbon Materials M M cylinder acid (HCl) acid (HCl) hydrochloric hydrochloric M Part A Data Table.Data Part A hydrochloric acidintoa wire gauze iron ring ring stand scissors ruler clock ortimer Bunsen burner stirring rod thermometer • Chapter17 Section 17.2 Use with 129 130 Data andObservations 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 7. 6. 5. Name atB EffectofConcentration Part B: uetmeaue(C eprtr °)tmeaue(C ie()reaction time(s) temperature (°C) temperature (°C) temperature (°C) Tube LAB noasprt,cen r ettb:4.0mLof drytesttube: clean, into aseparate, Prepare thefollowing solutionsandpoureach tion timeinthe magnesium toreactcompletely. Recordthereac- measurethetimerequiredfor with theacid, Starting assoonthemagnesiumisincontact the reaction. the magnesiumcompletelysubmerged throughout ribbon intotheacid.Usestirringrodtokeep thenplaceapieceofmagnesium Wait 3min, contains 150mLoftapwater. Place thetesttubeina250-mLbeaker that drytesttube. clean, Pour 10mLof3.0 and100¡C. 50¡C, at temperaturesofabout25¡C, Set upahot-water bathandrepeattheexperiment after thereaction. Measure andrecordthetemperatureofacid tion time. magnesium toreactcompletely. Recordthereac- measurethetimerequiredfor with theacid, Starting assoonthemagnesiumisincontact submerged throughoutthereaction. the stirringrodtokeep themagnesiumcompletely 4 3 2 1 Chemistry: Matter andChange 17.1 Initial Final Average Reaction Rate of Part BData Table M hydrochloric acidintoa . • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter17 Part ADataTable Cleanup andDisposal Hypotheses 7. 6. 4. 3. 2. 1. Repeat steps3and4foreachtesttube. contains 150mLoftapwater. Place eachtesttubeina250-mLbeaker that lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken or damagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyourteacher. turned off. Be surethegassupplyforBunsenburner is tap water and6.0mLof3.0 water and1.0mLof3.0 water and3.0mLof aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M M HCl. HCl; 9.0mLoftap M HCl; 7.0mLoftap

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Analyze andConclude 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Name ueAi ecintm s Rateofreaction Reactiontime(s) Acid Tube LAB was anaverage temperatureusedinPart A? of reactionforeachtubeinPart A andtherateofreactionforeachtubeinPart B. Why reaction time.Calculateandrecordinthedatatables theaverage temperatureandtherate therateofreactioniscalculated bydividing 1 bythe the changeinquantitytobe1. Thus, Using Numbers What effect doesconcentration have onreactionrate? Why arethetrialsinPart Bcarriedoutinabeaker ofwater? What effect doestemperature have onreactionrate? Why arethevolume andmolarityoftheacidsameineachtrialPart A? Why isitnecessarytocleanthemagnesium? 3.0mL 6.0mL3.0 3 10mL3.0 2 1 1.0mL3.0 4 17.1 eas h aso ansu stesm nec ecin assume Because themassofmagnesiumissameineach reaction, M M M M HCl, 0.0mLwater HCl, 7.0mLwater HCl, 4.0mLwater HCl, 9.0mLwater Part BDataTable aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter17 131 132 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB magnesium stripwas 6.0cmlonginsteadof3.0long? Making aPrediction was moreconcentrated?Explainwhy. Making aPrediction from Part B. Were yourhypothesessupported?Explain. usingthedata using thedatafromPart A. Then make agraphofconcentrationversus time, Graphing Data proportional totemperature. decreased? Explainwhetherthereactionratesaredirectlyproportionalorinversely as thetemperatureofacidsolutionincreased? As thetemperatureofacidsolution Observing andInferring Error Analysis temperature. not spoilasquicklythose leftatroom Explain whyrefrigeratedor frozenfoodsdo be controlled? andthustherateofcorrosion, acid intherain, andstatues?How canconcentrationofthe biles, automo- corrosion ofmetalsusedinbuildings, What effect doesacidrainhave ontherate of Chemistry: Matter andChange 17.1 naseto rp ae,make agraphoftemperatureversus time, On asheetofgraphpaper, What couldyouhave donetoimprove theprecisionofmeasurements? Would youexpect thegraphstohave thesameshapesifeach Would youexpect thereactionrateinPart A toincreaseiftheacid i h ecinrt erae nrae orremainthesame increase, Did thereactionratedecrease, • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter17 3. been depletedfaster thanitwas replaced. Explain whyinrecentdecadestheozonehas ozone inEarth’s ozonelayerwas constant. theproductionanddestructionof For centuries, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. I Surface Area andReactionRate aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions tion rate? temperature haveonreac- nation ofsurfaceareaand What effect doesacombi- area haveonreactionrate? What effect doessurface Problem Name combination offactorscanaffect reactionrate. surface areaonrateofreaction.You willalsodeterminehowa number ofcollisions.Inthislab,youwillexaminetheeffect of collision frequencyincreases.Ifsurfaceareadecreases,sodoesthe collision, and,thus,therateofreaction.Ifsurfaceareaincreases, collide. Changingtheamountofsurfaceareamodifiesrate chemical reactionistotakeplace,themoleculesofreactantsmust reaction rateistheamountofsurfaceareareactants.Ifa Surface Area andReactionRate n Lab17.1,youlearnedabouttheeffect oftemperatureand concentration onreactionrate.Anotherfactorthataffects What factors areconstant inthisexperiment? your hypotheses. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow totest page 134. might bepredicted.Recordyourhypotheseson hypothesis abouthow therateofareaction area willaffect thereactionrate.Form asecond hypothesis abouthow anincreaseinsurface Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a area appliestoreactionrates. Summarize thecollisiontheoryandhow surface LAB 17.2 LABORATORY MANUAL Donoteatordrinkanythinginalaboratory. • Hotobjectsmaynotappeartobehot. • Alwayswearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • • • • Objectives reaction rates. more thanonefactoron Determine reaction. Measure reaction rates. varying surfaceareason Determine the rateof the effect of the effect of 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure second pieceoftablet. repeatsteps2through4fora As anothertrial, this timein Measure thetimeuntilreactionstops.Record the testtubethroughoutreaction. Immediately startthetimer. Stirthecontentsof Drop apieceoftheantacidtabletintowater. tap water. Pourthewater intoatesttube. Measure exactly 15.0mL ofroom-temperature pieces willbeusedforeachtrial. each tabletintofourequalpieces.Oneofthese Obtain five effervescent antacid tablets.Break aeClass Date Materials test tubes(18) 25-mL graduated effervescent cylinder antacid tablets(5) Data Table1. stirring rod mortar andpestle timer test-tube rack • Chapter17 Section 17.4 Use with 133 134 Data andObservations Hypotheses 9. 8. 7. 6. Name atcesz ra ubrRo eprtr odWarm 1 Cold Several pieces 1 Roomtemperature Trial number One piece Particle size Crushed 1 LAB Repeat steps2through7usingvery warm water. Repeat steps2through7usingcoldwater. powdered tablet. usingthe into apowder. Repeatsteps2through5, Use amortarandpestletogrindpieceoftablet using thesmallerpiecesoftablet. several smallerpieces.Repeatsteps2through5, Take anotherpieceoftabletandbreakitinto Chemistry: Matter andChange 17.2 Average Average Average 2 2 2 • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter17 Data Table 1 Time (s) 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Wash alltesttubesandstirringrods. Pour thesolutionsdown thedrain. aeClass Date Water temperature LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB to improve theaccuracy ofthepredictions? Drawing Conclusions factor thataffects reactionrateisinvolved? Explain. Predicting Drawing Conclusions Inferring Observing Table 1. Using Numbers Error Analysis iron helpprevent formation ofrust? Why doespaintingmetallic objectsthatcontain 17.2 What relationshipexists betweenreactiontimeandrate? What evidence didyouobserve toindicatethatareactionhadtaken place? Can relative reactionratesbepredictedwithcertaintywhenmorethanone Average thetimesforeachsetoftwo trials.Recordthesevalues in Were yourhypothesessupported?Explain. What couldyouhave done Write statementsthatsummarizetheresultsoflabactivity. How doesthecollision theoryexplain thereactiontimes? 2. neutralize stomachacids? to promotethesaleofaproduct designedto How mightparticlesizeofreactantsbevaried aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data • Chapter17 135

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. I Reversible Reactions aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions concentration. about bychangesin equilibrium brought Determine Objective at equilibrium? or productaffect asystem concentration ofareactant How doesachangeinthe Problem Name not change. same rate,sotheconcentrationsofreactantsandproductsdo equilibrium, theforwardandreversereactionsproceedat the reversereaction,systemissaidtobeatequilibrium.At re-form thereactantsinareversereaction. product createsanewequilibrium. activity, youwillseehowchangingtheconcentration ofareactantor relieve thestress.Onesuchstressisachangeofconcentration.Inthis subjected toastress,theequilibriumwillshiftindirectionthat Reversible Reactions n somechemicalreactions,thereactantsarenotentirelyconverted to products.Thisisbecauseastheproductsform,theyreact LAB LeCh When therateofforwardreactionisequalto â telier shifts of 18.1 ’ s principlestatesthatifasystematequilibriumis LABORATORY MANUAL Ammoniaisarespiratory irritant. • Hydrochloric acidiscorrosive toskinandreacts withmetals. • Potassiumthiocyanate,cobalt(II)chloride,andhydrochloric acidare • Ferricchlorideisaskinirritantandslightlytoxic. • Ammoniumchlorideisslightlytoxicbyingestion. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • toxic. 6 12 Materials 0.1 saturated sodiumchloride saturated ammoniumchloride 0.1 0.1 M solution (NaCl) solution (NH (KSCN) M M M M hydrochloric acid(HCl) hydrochloric acid(HCl) iron(III) chloride(FeCl potassium thiocyanate cobalt(II) chloride(CoCl 4 Cl) 3 aeClass Date ) 2 ) ammonium chloride(NH test-tube rack dropping pipettes(2) test tubes(9) 10-mL graduatedcylinder ammonia (ammoniumhydroxide iron(III) chlorideandpotassium and phenolphthalein)solution thiocyanate solution • Chapter18 Section 18.2 4 Use with Cl) 137 138 4. 3. 2. 1. 2. 1. Solution Chloride Part A: Procedure 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name Thiocyanate Solutions Iron(III) ChlorideandPotassium Part B: LAB record thecolorofsolution. Use thethirdtesttubeasacontrol.Noteand the colorchangein iron(III) chloridesolution.Observe andrecord add1mLof0.1 To thesecondtesttube, record thecolorchangein potassium thiocyanate solution.Observe and add1mLof0.1 To thefirst testtube, tubes. thiocyanate solutionintoeachofthreecleantest Pour 5mLofiron(III)chlorideandpotassium of 12 tion intoacleantesttube. Add 6drops Pour 3mLofsaturatedammoniumchloridesolu- Data Table1. hydrochloric acid.Recordyourobservations in into acleantesttube. Add 6dropsof12 Pour 3mLofsaturatedsodiumchloridesolution Record yourhypothesisinthenext column. equilibrium willcauseashiftofthesystem. hypothesis abouthow astressonsystemat Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a a decreaseintheconcentrationofreactant? In whichdirectionwillareactionshiftifthereis an increaseintheconcentrationofareactant? In whichdirectionwillareactionshiftifthereis State LeChâtelier’s principle. observations in M Chemistry: Matter andChange 18.1 hydrochloric acid.Recordyour Data Table1. Data Table1. Data Table1. • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter18 M M M atD AmmoniaSolution Part D: CobaltChlorideSolution Part C: 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 1. b. a. into athirdcleantesttube. Pour 2mLof0.1 into asecondcleantesttube. Pour 2mLof0.1 c. b. a. into acleantesttube. Pour 2mLof0.1 detergent beforeleaving thelab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlywithsoap or Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofchemicalsasinstructedbyyour b. a. clean testtube. Pour 5mLoftheammoniasolutionintoanother observations in second andthirdtesttubesrecordyour Compare thecolorsofcontents Add about1.5gofammoniumchloride. Record yourobservations in restored. Add water dropwiseuntiltheoriginalcoloris Add 3mLof12 Record yourobservations in Add 10dropsof6 the solution. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M M M Data Table1. M cobalt(II) chloridesolution cobalt(II) chloridesolution cobalt(II) chloridesolution M hydrochloric acid. hydrochloric acidandstir Data Table1. Data Table1.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name tpnme Observation Step number LAB c. b. a. Collecting andInterpreting Data Observing andInferring d. c. b. a. Collecting andInterpreting Data Part C: Part B: Part A: Part D: nPr ,se ,whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefor theequilibriumshift? step1, In Part D, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefor theequilibriumshift? step3, In Part C, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefortheequilibriumshift? step1, In Part C, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefortheequilibriumshift? step3, In Part B, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefortheequilibriumshift? step2, In Part B, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefortheequilibriumshift? step2, In Part A, whichionconcentrationchangeisresponsiblefortheequilibriumshift? step1, In Part A, 18.1 1 2 1 1 3 4 3 2 xli h enn facnrl sue nPr ,step4. asusedinPart B, Explain themeaningofacontrol, Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter18 139 140 6. 5. 4. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB hydrochloric acidwas added. Explain whathappenedtotheconcentrationofeachfollowing ionswhen auae ouino oimclrd.(e atA step1.) a saturatedsolutionofsodiumchloride.(SeePart A, Predicting c. b. a. expressed asfollows: Drawing aConclusion Explain. Error Analysis would have ontheyieldofammonia. Explain whateffect anincreaseinpressure the following reaction. are combinedtoformammoniaaccording nitrogenandhydrogen In theHaberprocess, CoCl Co(H Cl Chemistry: Matter andChange 18.1 4 2 2 N O) 2 (g) 6 Predict theeffect ofadding sodiumhydroxideinplaceofhydrochloricacidto 2 4Cl 3 H To whatextent areaccuracy and precisionfactors inthisactivity? (aq) 2 (g) The equilibriumsystemforthecobaltchloridesolutionmaybe 3 pn)(blue) (pink) Co(H 2 NH 2 O) • 3 Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter18 (g) 6 2 (aq) 3 6H 2 O(l) 2. may berepresentedlike this: soften hardwater. The equilibriumreaction A processcalledionexchange isoftenusedto exchange. drinking water softenedbythistypeofion tension (highbloodpressure)shouldavoid sodium ions.Explainwhypeoplewithhyper- Water softenedbythismethodcontains extra 2NaCl(s) CoCl aeClass Date 4 2 LABORATORY MANUAL (aq) X 2 (aq) 3 XCl 2 (aq) 2Na (aq)

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. equilibrium? affect asystemin How doesstress Problem Equilibrium aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Safety Precautions Name react formingcarbonicacid(H mixture ofcarbondioxidegasandwater. Thewaterandcarbondioxide The overallreactioncanbewrittenasfollows. the amountsofcarbonicacid,water, andcarbondioxideremainconstant. form waterandcarbondioxide.Astateofequilibriumisreachedinwhich available toreactinthereversedirection. removed? Thereactiongoestocompletionbecauseaproductisnot present inasolution.ThelowerthepH,moreacidispresent. club sodareaction,ameasurementofpHindicatestheamountacid reaction atequilibrium?Theanswerdependsuponthereaction.For temperature, orpressureareexamplesofstresses. products ifthesystemissubjectedtoastress.Changesinconcentration, system thatisatequilibriumcanbeshiftedtowardeitherreactantsor because oppositereactionstakeplacesimultaneouslyatthesamerate.A Chemical reactionsthatarereversiblesaidtobeindynamicequilibrium A Equilibrium LAB What happenstoareactionatequilibriumifoneoftheproductsis How canyouknowwhetherreactantsorproductsarefavoredina chemical reactioninwhichtheproductsreacttore-formoriginal reactants iscalledareversiblereaction.Forexample,clubsoda 18.2 LABORATORY MANUAL CO • • • Objectives Whenheatingthesolution inthetesttube,besure toheatslowly, • Take care inusingaBunsenburner. • Hydrochloric acidiscorrosive toskinandtoxicreacts withmetals. • Copper(II)sulfateisatissue irritantandtoxic. • Usecautionwhenhandlinghotsubstances. • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • 2 (g) that goestocompletion. equilibrium toareaction Compare system. stress onanequilibrium Describe equilibrium. Analyze else. pointing theopenendof thetesttubeawayfrom yourselforanyone 2 CO H 3 2 ). Carbonicaciddecomposestoagain O(l) a systemat the effect ofa a systemat 3 H 2 CO 3 (aq) Bunsen burner test-tube clamp rubber stoppertofit test-tube rack test tubes(4) club soda(one Materials aeClass Date test tube temperature) bottle atroom bottle chilled,one 0.5 pH paperor 10-mL graduated 1.0 0.5 • sulfate (CuSO meter cylinder acid (HCl) (Na carbonate Chapter18 M M M 2 copper(II) hydrochloric sodium CO Section 18.3 3 ) Use with 4 ) 141 Part B: Forming aPrecipitate Forming Part B: 142 1. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Equilibrium Part A: Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name LAB test tube. sodium carbonatesolution. Stopperandshake the into acleantesttubeandadd about5mLof Pour about5mLofcopper(II) sulfate solution the pHin to roomtemperatureandagaintestrecord boiling. Allow thecontentsoftube tocool Carefully heatthetesttubeofcoldclubsodato Table 1. each testtube.Recordthesevalues in testthepHof clubsodain After 2minutes, drytesttube. soda intoanotherclean, drytesttubeand5mLofcoldclub one clean, Pour 5mLofroom-temperatureclubsodainto removed. happens asthecapsareloosenedandthen Remove thecapsfrombothbottles.Notewhat either bottle. refrigerated clubsoda. Observe thecontentsofanunopenedbottle club sodaatroomtemperature. Observe thecontentsofanunopenedbottle of aprecipitate. that goestocompletionbecauseoftheformation ship betweenreactantsandproductsinareaction Write ageneralizedequationtoshow therelation- at equilibrium. ship betweenreactantsandproductsinasystem Write ageneralizedequationtoshow therelation- your hypothesesinthenext column. from thisreactiontoprevent equilibrium.Record hypothesis aboutwhatsubstancecanberemoved club sodatoshifttheequilibrium.Form asecond hypothesis abouthow astresscanbeappliedto Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a reaction thatgoestocompletion. Distinguish betweenareversible reactionanda Define Chemistry: Matter andChange 18.2 chemical equilibrium Data Table1. ATO:Donotshake CAUTION: . • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter18 Data Hypotheses 2. 1. 2. 1. Data andObservations 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Part C: Forming aGas Forming Part C: pH afterheating Initial pH Observe thereactionthattakes place. hydrochloric acid. into acleantesttube.Slowly add5mLof Pour about5mLofsodiumcarbonatesolution (precipitate) atthebottomoftesttube. clear liquidformsabove thesolidmaterial Allow thetesttubetoremainundisturbeduntila two unopenedbottlesofclubsoda. Compare theappearanceofcontents lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken or damagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyourteacher. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table 1 odcu Room-temperature Cold club oaclubsoda soda

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Equilibrium Part A: Analyze andConclude 3. 2. Name LAB club sodawas heated. Drawing aConclusion Observing andInferring club sodawas heated. Observing andInferring heated. Observing andInferring and thenafterheating. Collecting andInterpreting Data bottle ofclubsodawas opened. Observing andInferring an unopenedbottleofclubsoda. Observing andInferring Describe thecolorsofsodiumcarbonatesolutionandcopper(II)sulfate solution. removed. Describe whathappensasthecapsoftwo bottlesofclubsodaareloosenedandthen 18.2 Write abalancedequation for thereactionthattookplaceas What gaswas releasedastheclubsodawas heated? Describe thestressthatcausedanequilibriumshiftwhen the Describe theappearanceofclubsodaasitwas being Describe thestressthatcausedanequilibriumshiftwhen Describe evidence that indicatesthatanequilibriumexists in Account forthepHofclubsodabeforeheating aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter18 143 144 14. 13. 12. aGas Forming Part C: 11. 10. aPrecipitate Forming Part B: Name 9. 8. Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB might have beenpresent? hydrochloric acidgoestocompletion. Drawing aConclusion carbonate solutionandhydrochloricacidweremixed. Predicting hydrochloric acidwas addedtosodiumcarbonatesolution? Observing andInferring copper(II) sulfate goestocompletion. Drawing aConclusion formula forthissubstance? Observing andInferring carbonate andcopper(II)sulfate solutionsaremixed. Predicting irgncnann opud,suchas nitrogen-containing compounds, freenitrogenintouseful a processto“fix” FritzHaberdiscovered In theearly1900s, be usedbyacertaindate. beverages oftenrecommendthatthebeverage Explain whylabelsonbottlesofcarbonated Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 18.2 Write abalancedequationforthereactionthattookplacewhensodium Write abalancedequationforthereactionthattakes placewhensodium Do yourresultssupporthypotheses? What sourcesoferror Explain whythereactionbetweensodiumcarbonate and Explain whythereactionbetweensodiumcarbonateand What evidence indicates thatareactiontookplacewhen Describe theappearanceofprecipitate. What isthe • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter18 to thisequation. with hydrogentoproduce ammonia according that atmosphericnitrogencan becombined explain how anequilibriumcanbeshiftedso ammonia. UseLeChâtelier’s principleto aeClass Date N 2 (g) LABORATORY MANUAL 3H 2 (g) 3 2NH 3 (g) heat

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. N cd,Bss andNeutralization Bases, Acids, aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 19 Laboratory Manual reaction? during aneutralization What substanceisformed Problem Name solution. Thereactionmaybeshownbythisequation. ions oftheacidicsolutionreactwithhydroxideinbasic In anacid-baseneutralizationreaction,thehydronium(hydrogen) acidic solutionsandturnsredinbasicsolutions. solutions andblueinbasicsolutions.Phenolphthaleiniscolorless color atorverynearsolutionneutrality. Litmuspaper isredinacidic used inacid-basereactions.Theyarechosenbecausetheychange pH. Litmuspaperandphenolphthaleinaretwocommonindicators amounts ofacidandbasearepresent. hydroxide ions.Thesolutionisneutralwhenchemicallyequivalent Note thatonemoleofhydroniumionsreactswith cd,Bss andNeutralization Bases, Acids, LAB Indicators arechemicaldyesthatchangecolorwithaof eutralization isachemicalreactionbetweenanacidandbase that producesasaltandwater. 19.1 LABORATORY MANUAL H acid 3 O (aq) • • • • Objectives base base. reaction ofanacidanda during theneutralization what substanceisformed Draw aconclusion basic. changes fromacidicto when thesolution color ofanindicator Observe indicator inthatsolution. ing thecolorofan acid orabasebyobserv- Classify basic solution. solution toitscolorina an indicatorinacidic Compare OH 0 salt a solutionasan (aq) the changein the colorof 0 water H 2 about O(l) aeClass Date 1.00 1 1.00 Materials blue litmuspapers phenolphthalein limewater— 1 1 M M M (HC (6) (Ca(OH) hydroxide saturated calcium (NH hydroxide hydroxide (NaOH) (H acid (HCl) acetic acid ammonium Sulfuric acid 2 M M SO 2 4 H OH) sodium hydrochloric 4 3 ) O 2 2 ) solution ) evaporating dish filter paper stirring rod wire gauze ring ring stand striker Bunsen burner dropping pipette test-tube rack test tubes(6) 10-mL graduated 100-mL beakers(2) red litmus cylinder papers (6) Section 19.4 Use with 145 146 AcidsandBases Part A: Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB into testtubenumber2. into testtubenumber3. paper. pieces ofbluelitmuspaper onapieceoffilter Place sixpiecesofredlitmuspaperand hydroxide (Ca(OH) saturatedcalcium Pour about1mLoflimewater, (NH Pour about1mLof (NaOH) intotesttubenumber4. Pour about1mLof Pour about1mLof Pour about1mLof into testtubenumber1. Pour about1mLof Number sixtesttubes1through6. test yourhypothesis. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow to hypothesis onpage147. a basehasbeenneutralized.Recordyour hypothesis abouthow toknow whenanacidor Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a and basicsolutions. Compare thecolorofphenolphthaleininacidic basic solutions. Compare thecoloroflitmuspaperinacidicand Define neutralization. hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr1 Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 19 4 19.1 OH) intotesttubenumber5. 2 ,intotesttubenumber6. ), M M M M M ammonium hydroxide sodium hydroxide acetic acid(HC sulfuric acid(H hydrochloric acid(HCl) Limewaterisatissueirritant. • Sodiumhydroxide and ammoniumhydroxide are causticandtoxic. • Hydrochloric acid,sulfuric acid,andaceticacidare toxic. • Hydrochloric acid,sulfuric acid,andaceticacidare corrosive toskin • Disposeofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • and clothing. 2 2 H SO 3 O 4 ) 2 ) 11. 10. atB Neutralization Part B: 13. 12. 9. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. stirring rodbetweensolutiontests. for theremainingsolutions.Besuretorinse Rinse thestirringrodandrepeatsteps910 Record yourobservations in paper. of hydrochloricacidtoapiecebluelitmus piece ofredlitmuspaper. Then transfer1drop hydrochloric acid(testtubenumber1)toa Use astirringrodtotransfer1dropof sn rpigppte add1.00 Using adroppingpipette, 1.00 Stir theacidandgraduallyaddabout9mLof acid intheevaporating dish. Add 2dropsofphenolphthaleinsolutiontothe into acleanevaporating dish. 10.0 mLofhydrochloricacid(HCl)andpourit measure Using the10-mLgraduatedcylinder, (NaOH) intothebeaker. about 15mLof1.00 andpour Label another100-mLbeaker “base” the beaker. 15 mLof1.00 and pourabout Label a100-mLbeaker “acid” Record yourobservations inthedatatable. solution ineachofthenumberedtesttubes. Add 2dropsofphenolphthaleinsolutiontoeach red color. base causesthesolutionto remainapermanent until1dropof stirringaftereachdrop, solution, hydroxide (NaOH)dropbytotheacid aeClass Date M sodium hydroxide(NaOH). LABORATORY MANUAL M hydrochloric acid(HCl)into M sodium hydroxide Data Table1. M sodium

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 19 Laboratory Manual Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 10. Name 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. ettb aeo Clro Clro Clro Acid Colorof Colorof Colorof Nameof Test-tube LAB ubrsbtnebu imsrdltu hnlhhli or base? phenolphthalein red litmus bluelitmus substance number the contents. Allow theevaporating dishtocoolandexamine of theevaporating dishtoneardryness. Use aBunsenburner toslowly heatthecontents the wiregauze. gauze onthering.Placeevaporating dish on Attach aringtostandandplacewire Add 1dropof1.00 between anacidandabase. Applying Concepts Classifying an acidandabase. Applying Concepts osntdsper addanotherdrop. does notdisappear, The redcolorshoulddisappear. Iftheredcolor Aceticacid Sulfuricacid Hydrochloricacid 3 2 1 Calciumhydroxide Ammoniumhydroxide Sodiumhydroxide 6 5 4 19.1 Complete thelastcolumnof M hydrochloric acid(HCl). Describe how phenolphthaleinmaybeusedtodifferentiate Describe how litmuspapermaybeusedtodifferentiate between Data Table1. Data Table 1 Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 4. 3. 2. 1. laboratory. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofchemicalsasinstructedbyyour aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 147 148 11. 10. Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB mixed. 10.0 mLof1.00 Predicting between hydrochloricacidandsodiumhydroxide. Measuring andUsingNumbers of theevaporating dishtoneardryness. Drawing aConclusion contents oftheevaporating dishtoneardryness. Observing andInferring Observing andInferring in step6? Observing andInferring 10.0 mLof1.00 Observing andInferring dents inyourclass. What aresomereasonsthattheanswersmightbedifferent? the redcolordisappearinstep7? stomach acid. and acidinhibitorsinthetreatment ofexcess Explain thedifference betweenusingantacids Error Analysis hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr1 Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 19 19.1 What quantityof2.00 M M hydrochloric acid?Explain. hydrochloric acidandabout9mLof1.00 Compare youranswersin Identify thesolidresidueremainingafterheatingcontents Why was adropof1.00 What isthesignificance ofthepermanentredcolorchange Describe thesolidresidueremainingafterheating Explain whythephenolphthaleinremainedcolorlesswhen M Write abalancedchemicalequationforthereaction sodium hydroxidewould beneededtoneutralize Data Table1 2. M in theagriculturaleconomy. Explain whyneutralization ofsoilisimportant hydrochloric acidaddedtomake aeClass Date to theanswersofotherstu- M sodium hydroxidewere LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Acetic Acid in Vinegar Acetic Acid Determining thePercent of aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange•Chapter 19 Laboratory Manual Pre-Lab Safety Precautions • • • Objectives in vinegar? What isthepercentofaceticacid Problem Name determine thepercentofaceticacidinvinegar. number ofmolesandthemassaceticacidinyourvinegarsample acetic acid(HC standardized solutiontotitrateasampleofvinegar. Vinegar isasolutionof solution totitrateaknownmassofoxalicacid(H that youneedtocalculatethemolarityofunknownacidorbase. standard solutionandthevolumeofunknownacidorbasesolution—areall been reached.Your experimentaldata—thevolumeandmolarityofthe mixture, tellsyoubymeansofacolorchange,whentheequivalencepointhas moles ofacidandbaseareequal.Anindicator, placedinthereaction point isreached.Attheequivalenceofaneutralizationreaction, been accuratelydeterminedexperimentally. of astandardbaseoranacid.Asolutionisonewhosemolarityhas Acetic Acid in Vinegar Acetic Acid Determining thePercent of 3. 2. 1. acid invinegar. Determine NaOH solution. Determine Prepare LAB In thisactivity, youwillfirststandardizeaNaOHsolution byusingthe In atitration,onesolutionisaddedslowlytotheotheruntilequivalence error. State theequationusedto determine percent What isastandardsolution? reaction. Briefly explain whathappensinaneutralization a basebyneutralizingknownvolumeoftheacidorwithsolution itration isaprocedureusedfordeterminingtheconcentrationofanacidor a solutionofNaOH. 19.2 the percentofacetic the molarityof 2 H 3 O 2 ). Fromyourtitrationdata,youwillbeabletocalculatethe LABORATORY MANUAL Wipeupanywaterspillstoavoidslippage. • Sodiumhydroxide iscaustic,andoxalicacidcorrosive. • Oxalicacidandsodiumhydroxide are toxic. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalabapron. • oxalic acid(H acetic acidsolution(whitevinegar) sodium hydroxidepellets(NaOH) Materials 250-mL plasticbottlewithscrew 250-mL beaker 250-mL Erlenmeyerflasks(2) phenolphthalein solution top 2 C 2 C 2 2 O 4. O 4 4 ). Then,youwilluseyour Record yourhypothesison page151. determine theconcentration ofanothersolution. hypothesis aboutusingastandard solutionto Read theentirelaboratory activity. Form a 2H aeClass Date 2 O) distilled water label balance burette clamp burette ring stand 100-mL graduated cylinder Section 19.4 Use with 149 150 Figure A Standardizing anNaOHSolution Part A: Procedure Name 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB Table 1. Record theinitialvolume ofNaOHin beaker. two ofNaOHmayrunout intothewaste cock andfill thetipofburette. A dropor waste placea To eliminateany airintheburette tip, the NaOHlevel isaroundthe5-mLmark. enough NaOHsolutionintotheburette sothat Close thestopcockofburette andpour with 5to10mLofyourNaOHsolution. andfinally Then rinseitwithdistilledwater, Prepare theburette byrinsingitwithtapwater. Erlenmeyer flaskasshown in and250-mL burette clamp, Set uptheburette, Sodiumhydroxide iscaustic. CAUTION: NaOH pelletsin200mLofdistilledwater. dissolve about50 In the250-mLplasticbottle, of preparationonthelabel. NaOH Solution Label aclean250-mLplasticbottle Erlenmeyer hmsr:Mte n hne•Catr1 Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter andChange•Chapter 19 19.2 Stopcock beaker undertheburette. Openthestop- Burette flask . Write yournameandthedate Figure A. Standard Data stand Ring clamp Burette 12. 11. 10. Vinegar DeterminingthePercent of Acid in Part B: 14. 13. 9. 8. 4. 3. 2. 1. acid tomix. the acid.Swirlflasktoallow thebaseand of theNaOHtoflow into theflaskcontaining Begin thetitrationbyallowing smallamounts burette is1Ð2cminsidethemouthofflask. flask undertheburette sothatthetipof flask containingtheacidsolution.Place Add 3dropsofphenolphthaleinsolutiontothe until theoxalicaciddissolves. flask containingtheacid.Gentlyswirl Pour about50mLofdistilledwater intothe flask andacidin measure itsmassagain.Recordtheof Add about1.0gofoxalicacidtotheflaskand empty flaskandrecorditin with distilledwater. Measurethemassof Clean andrinsea250-mLErlenmeyer flask in Part A. Recordthefinal volume ofNaOHused following steps11through14in solution, Add thesodiumhydroxidesolutiontoacid Table 2. 5-mL mark.Recordthisinitialvolume in the level ofthesolutionisatapproximately Refill theburette withNaOHsolutionsothat Record themassin measure themassofflaskandvinegar. and Pour about30mLofvinegar intotheflask, Table 2. Erlenmeyer flaskandrecorditsmassin Measure themassofasecondclean250-mL volume oftheNaOHsolutionin light pinkcolorisobtained.Recordthefinal Continue toadddropsofbaseuntilapermanent drop-wise. burette sothatthebaserunsintoacid equivalence point. Adjust thestopcockof youareclosetothe take longertodisappear, When thepinkcolorofindicatorbegins to aeClass Date Data Table2. LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table1. Data Table2. Data Table1. Data Table1. Data Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 2. 1. Data andObservations Hypothesis Name Molarity ofNaOH( Moles ofNaOH(mol) Volume of NaOHused(mL) Initial volumeofNaOH(mL) Final volumeofNaOH(mL) Moles ofoxalicacid(mol) Mass ofoxalicacid(g) Mass ofemptyflask(g) Mass offlaskandoxalicacid(g) LAB Applying Concepts determineandrecord thenumberofmolesoxalicacid. of oxalicacid, Measuring andUsingNumbers b. a. Complete b. a. Complete NaOH. What istheratio ofmolesNaOHtoH The volume ofNaOHrequiredtoneutralizethe acetic acidinthevinegar sample The massofthevinegar sample The volume ofNaOHsolutionusedtoneutralizetheoxalicacid The massofoxalicacidusedtostandardizetheNaOHsolutioninPart A 19.2 Data table2 Data Table1 Data Table 1 M ) Write theequationforreactionofoxalicacid(H by calculatingthefollowing: by calculatingthefollowing: From themassofoxalicacidusedandmolar 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Mass ofvinegar(g) Mass ofemptyflask(g) Mass offlaskandvinegar(g) vinegar solution Percentage ofaceticacidin Mass ofaceticacid(g) Volume of NaOHused(mL) Initial volumeofNaOH(mL) Final volumeofNaOH(mL) thoroughly beforeleaving thelab. Clean upyourlabareaandwash yourhands Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. chemicals asinstructedbyyourteacher. Dispose ofusedchemicalsandreturnexcess 2 C 2 aeClass Date O 4 ? LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table 2 2 C 2 O 4 ) with • Chapter19 151 152 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB answer) value suppliedbyyourteacher. Use the equationpercenterror vinegar sampletocalculatethepercentaceticacidinvinegar. Measuring andUsingNumbers acetic acidtocalculatethemassofinvinegar sample. Measuring andUsingNumbers acid areinthevinegar sample? What istheratioofmolesNaOHtoaceticacid?How many molesofacetic Applying Concepts acid inthevinegar sample. ume ofNaOHusedinpartBtodeterminethemolestitrateacetic Measuring andUsingNumbers the molarityofNaOH( NaOH anddeterminethemolesofperliter. Recordyourresultin Measuring andUsingNumbers ratio fromquestion2todeterminethemolesofNaOH. Applying Concepts Error Analysis environment. mine theeffects ofacidrainonthe Explain how titrationmightbeusedtodeter- Chemistry: Matter andChange 19.2 100. Explainwhaterrorscouldhave contributed toany deviation. Calculate thepercenterrorofexperimental resultusingtheactual Write theequationforneutralizationofaceticacid(HC Use themolesofoxalicacidcalculatedinquestion1andmole M ). • Catr1 LaboratoryManual Chapter19 Use themassofaceticacidandtotal Use themolesofaceticacidandmolarmass Use themolarityofNaOHsolutionandvol- Convert thevolume ofNaOHusedinmLtoL 2. medical testing. Explain how titrationmightbeusedfor aeClass Date (deviation/correct LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table1 2 H 3 O as 2 ).

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. of Metals Electron-Losing Tendencies aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions • • Objectives stronger reducingagent? which oftwometalsisthe How doyoudetermine Problem Name agents, andthenperformtwoexperimentstoverifyyourpredictions. information topredicttherelativestrengthsofmetalsasreducing will reviewtheelectronegativitiesofseveralmetals,use A strongreducingagenthasalowelectronegativity. Inthislab,you A of Metals Electron-Losing Tendencies prediction. Experiment als asreducingagents. strengths ofseveralmet- Predict is thestrongerreducingagent? that ofsilver is1.93. Which ofthesetwo metals The electronegativity ofaluminumis1.61and period? Which two areinthesamegroup? the periodictable. Which threeareinthesame andzincon copper, calcium, Locate magnesium, LAB chemical speciesthatisabletoreducetheoxidationstateof another speciesbydonatingelectronsiscalledareducingagent. the relative 20.1 to verifythe LABORATORY MANUAL Magnesiumnitrateisaskinandeyeirritant. • Zincnitrateisasevere bodytissueirritant. • Copper(II)nitrateismoderatelytoxic. • Calciumiscorrosive andharmfultohumantissue. • Phenolphthaleinsolutionistoxicandflammable.Besure noopen • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalabapron. • flames are inthelabwhenphenolphthaleinsolutionisuse. magnesium nitratesolution zinc nitratesolution(Zn(NO forceps 50-mL graduatedcylinder 10-mL graduatedcylinder grease pencil test-tube rack test tubes(3) Materials copper(II) nitratesolution (Mg(NO (Cu(NO 3 3 ) 2 ) 2 ) ) 4. 3. your hypothesis. Summarize theprocedure you willusetotest weakest. Recordyourhypothesisonpage154. from strongestto four metalsasreducingagents, hypothesis abouttherelative strengthsofthese Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a aeClass Date 3 ) 2 ) 1.0 dropper phenolphthalein indicator 250-mL beaker steel woolorfinesandpaper calcium (Ca)(2smallchunks) magnesium (Mg)ribbonstrips(5) copper (Cu)metalstrips(3) zinc (Zn)metalstrips(3) M hydrochloric acid(HCl) • Chapter20 Section 20.1 Use with 153 154 Data andObservations 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Part A Procedure Name LAB with magnesium. then first withcopper, Repeat steps5through7, solutions asdirectedbyyourteacher. test tubesthoroughlywithwater. Discardtheused with water anddrywithpapertowels. Rinsethe remove thezincstrips.Rinsethem Using forceps, Pour thecontentsoftesttubesintoabeaker. write“NR.” tion. Ifthereisnoreaction, in recordyourobservations After about5minutes, Place azincstripineachofthetesttubes. their respective solutions. Fill thethreetesttubesto5-mLlevel with other two testtubes. 5-mL level. Discardthewater. Repeatforthe Use thegreasepenciltomarktesttubeat cylinder. Pourthewater intooneofthetesttubes. Measure 5mLoftapwater intothegraduated solutions. places intherackwithnamesofthree andlabeltheir Place threetesttubesintherack, with thesteelwool orsandpaper. andmagnesium copper, Clean thestripsofzinc, Data Table1. lmn Reaction withH Element Zn(NO Element Chemistry: Matter andChange Mg Mg Cu Ca Zn 20.1 Describe any evidence ofareac- 3 ) 2 Data Table 2 Data Table 1 • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter20 2 Reactionwith HCl O Cu(NO 3 ) 2 Part B Hypothesis 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal eetses1truh5 using1.0 Repeat steps1through5, Record yourobservations in aside untilthenext dayandobserve itagain. Putthereaction write“NR.” see noreaction, Observe thereactionsforabout5minutes.Ifyou and placeitinthebeaker. obtainasmallpieceofcalcium Using forceps, tube. Place astripofmagnesiumribboninthetest tube andthebeaker. Place 2dropsofphenolphthaleininboththetest 50 mLofdistilledwater ina250-mLbeaker. Put 15mLofdistilledwater inatesttubeand lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. ing toyourteacher’s directions. Dispose oftheusedmetalsandsolutionsaccord- of water. aeClass Date Mg(NO LABORATORY MANUAL 3 ) 2 Data Table2. M HCl instead

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name LAB Why? Predicting Interpreting Data results? Figure 9-15onpage263ofthetextbook.) Dothesefigures supportyourexperimental Using Numbers fromstrongestreducingagenttoweakest. als, Comparing andContrasting weakest. Which ofthetwo metalsinPart Bisthestrongerreducingagent? Sequencing Applying Concepts phenolphthalein addedtothedistilledwater? Observing andInferring no reactiontakes place. identifythereducingagentbycirclingit. Write nothingforthecombinationsinwhich one, Communicating 20.1 Do youthinkberylliumwould beastrongerreducingagentthanmagnesium? re h easi atAb tegha euigaet strongestto Order themetalsinPart A bystrength asareducingagent, What aretheelectronegativities ofthefourmetalsused?(Referto Write equationsforallofthereactionsthatyouobserved. For each nPr ,whatcouldbedonetoquantifytheresultsofeachreaction? In Part B, All thesereactionsareofthesametype. What type isit? Examine theequationsyouwroteforPart B. Why was the Use yourresultsfromparts A andBlistthefourmet- aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter20 155 156 10. Name 9. Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB hypothesis? Make astatementrelatingyourresultstohypothesis. Which ofthetwo isthestrongerreducingagent?Explain. Comparing andContrasting nature? Why iscalciumnotfoundasafreeelementin for metallicsculpturesthatarelocatedoutside? Why doyouthinkcopperiscommonlyused Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 20.1 Do thestrengthsoffourmetalsasreducingagentssupportyour Look uptheelectronegativities ofberylliumandzinc. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter20 3. Explain. two metalsdoyouthinkismorereactive? a processcalledgalvanizing. Which ofthese Zinc metalisoftenusedtocoatironobjectsin aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. O Determining OxidationNumbers aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions tendency ofelectrons? the half-reactionsandtheir determined byanalyzing Can oxidationnumbersbe Problem Name analysis todetermineoxidationnumbersoftheinvolvedsubstances. lab, youwillusereductionpotentialscombinedwithgravimetric information onelectronmovementinredoxhalf-reactions.Inthis standard reductionpotentialsexistthatprovidequantitative electrons. Thistendencyiscalledthereductionpotential.Tables of about thetendencyofionsinvolvedinhalf-reactionstogain order tousethechemistryofredoxreactions,weneedknow lost andareductionhalf-reactioninwhichelectronsaregained.In reactions involveanoxidationhalf-reactioninwhichelectronsare batteries tophotosynthesisandrespiration.You knowredox Determining OxidationNumbers form copper(II)nitrateandpotassiumsolid. copper solidwithpotassiumnitratethatwould and(b)thereactionof nitrate andsilver solid, copper solidwithsilver nitratetoformcopper(II) Write thenetionicequationfor(a)reactionof reduction of Ag and(b)the andCu, K, (a) theoxidationof Ag, Write theequationsforchemicalreactions LAB xidation They arethebasisofmanyproductsandprocesses,from 20.2 – reduction reactionsareveryimportantinchemistry. ,K LABORATORY MANUAL uI,andCu(II). Cu(I), , Silvernitrateiscaustic,highlytoxic,andwillstainskin. • Alwayswearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalabapron. • • • Objectives substances. numbers ofchemical Determine to gainelectrons. the tendencyofelements Investigate oxidation and quantify 4. 3. hypothesis onpage158. can determineoxidationnumbers.Recordyour Formulate ahypothesis astohow thelabactivity substance isinthebeaker(s) afterthereaction? will show evidence ofachemicalreaction? What study ofreactivity inChapter10. Which beaker(s) Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Recallyour aeClass Date silver nitrate 10-cm longcopper 75-mL beakers(4) Materials potassium nitrate (AgNO wire segments(2) (KNO 3 ) 3 ) distilled water masking tape stirring rod funnel filter papers(2) • Chapter20 Section 20.2 Use with 157 158 13. 12. 11. 10. Procedure Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB describe thecontentsofeachbeaker. After 20minuteshave passed(fromstep9), preparation forfiltration. Fold eachpieceoffilter paperintoquartersin mass. Weigh eachpieceoffilter paper andrecordthe filter paper. of filter paperand carefullywrite With apencil, in thesolutions. Record thetimethatwiresweresubmerged in thesolution. beaker 2.Becarefulnottosubmerge thelabel beaker 1andthecopperwirelabeledKin Now placethecopper wirelabeled Ag in labeled copperwire. Weigh andrecordthemassofeachpiece remaining outofthesolution. tions presentineachbeaker withonlythelabel in thefunnelandcanbesubmerged inthesolu- Coil eachpieceofcopperwiresothatitwillfit wire tobeusedwiththepotassiumnitrate. and to beusedwiththesilver nitrate, label eachpieceofwire. Write Take asmallpieceofmaskingtapeanduseitto solved. andstiruntildis- containing potassiumnitrate, Add approximately20mLofwater tobeaker 2, andstiruntildissolved. containing silver nitrate, Add approximately20mLofwater tobeaker 1, the secondbeaker. Labelthisbeaker andplacethesamplein record theexact mass, Measure a4-gsampleofpotassiumnitrate, Label thisbeaker andplacethesampleinfirst beaker. mass, recordtheexact Measure 4gofsilver nitrate, Chemistry: Matter andChange 20.2 1 K . on asecondpieceof Ag Ag • on onepiece Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter20 on thewire 2 K . on the 18. 17. 16. 15. 14. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 20. 19. 4. 3. 2. 1. residue) labeledK. the copperwireandfilter paper(withpossible weighandrecordthemassesofboth Once dry, filter paperwithresidueasidetodry. tents ofbeaker 1.Setboththecopperwireand labeled Ag andrinsingthewirewithcon- Repeat steps14and15usingthecopperwire dry. filter paperfromthefunnelandsetitasideto Set thecopperwireasidetodry. Remove the wire. rinsingthe of beaker 2over thecopperwire, from thefunnelandcarefullypourcontents another beaker. Slightlyliftthecopperwire Place thefunnelwithKcopperwirein the funnel. and carefullyremove theKwireandplacein Place thefilter paperlabeledKinthefunnel ing thelab. thoroughly withsoapordetergent beforeleav- Clean upyourworkstation andwash yourhands Return allequipmenttoitsproperplace. waste containerorcollectedforrecycling. The solidsrecovered maybeplacedinthesolid flushed withwater. All solutionscanbepoureddown thedrainand Complete thetablesandcalculations. residue) labeled Ag. the copperwireandfilter paper(withpossible weighandrecordthemassesofboth Once dry, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Name ekr1Datavalues Appearance ofbeaker1after20minutes Divide molesofAgbyCuused Moles ofAgonfilterpaper(mol) Formula weightofAg(g/mol) Mass ofAgonfilterpaper(g) Initial massoffilterpaper(g) Final massoffilterpaperandAg(g) Moles ofcopperusedinreaction(mol) Formula weightofcopper(g/mol) Mass ofcopperwireusedinreaction(g) Final massofcopperwire(g) Initial massofcopperwire(g) Mass ofsilvernitrate(g) Beaker 1 ekr2Datavalues Appearance ofbeaker2after 20minutes Divide molesofKby of Cuused Moles ofsubstanceonfilter paper(mol) Formula weightofK(g/mol) Mass ofsubstanceonfilterpaper(g) Initial massoffilterpaper(g) Final massoffilterpaperandsubstance(g) Moles ofcopperusedinreaction(mol) Formula weightofcopper(g/mol) Mass ofcopperwireusedinreaction(g) Final massofcopperwire(g) Initial massofcopperwire(g) Mass ofpotassiumnitrate(g) Beaker 2 LAB 20.2 Data Table 1 Data Table 2 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter20 159 160 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB differences. why noreactiontookplaceinbeaker 2. Observing andInferring Drawing aConclusion many electronsperCuatomwereoxidized? Applying Concepts consumed inbeaker 1? Comparing andContrasting Collecting andInterpreting Data Error Analysis Which substanceisreduced? What substanceisoxidizedinthisreaction? of silver bromideinthepresenceoflight. This isduetotheoxidationÐreductionreaction Silver isanimportantelementinphotography. Chemistry: Matter andChange 20.2 2AgBr Compare yourpredictionstotheexperimental results.Explainany light fterdcino grqie nyoeeeto e tm how If thereductionof Ag requiresonlyoneelectronperatom, 0 What istheoxidationnumberofCuioninsolution? 2Ag Use yourknowledge of reactivity fromChapter10toinfer What istheratioofmoles Ag formedtomolesofCu • Br Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter20 2 Did areactionoccurinbeaker 1?Inbeaker 2? 2. light usedinmostdarkrooms? 5.5 minuteswithyellow light. Why isared amount ofsilver bromide thatisreducedin requires only15secondstoreducethesame is themostenergetic visible wavelength. It wavelength (orenergy) ofthelight. Violet light The amountofreductionisdependentonthe aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

LAB 21.1 LABORATORY MANUAL

Use with ElectrolysisElectrolysis ofof WaterWater Section 21.3

ater has a remarkably complex structure. For the purposes of Welectrolysis, however, it is convenient to think of water as an aqueous solution of H and OH ions. In the presence of an anode, which has a surplus of electrons, the H ions are attracted and they line up to receive electrons. Conversely, at an electron-hungry cathode, OH ions line up to donate electrons. To test for the presence of hydrogen, inject the gas to be tested into bubble solution. The resulting bubbles should ignite easily. To test for the presence of oxygen, insert a glowing splint into the gas. The splint should immediately ignite. In this lab, you will discover what happens when an electric current is passed through water.

Problem Materials What happens when an solid bromothymol blue indicator 5-mL disposable syringes (2) electric current is passed (a few grains) 25-mL beaker through water? dilute sodium bicarbonate 100-mL beaker solution (10 mL) small polypropylene transfer Objectives dilute vinegar (10 mL) pipettes (2) glycerol (1 mL) surgical rubber or silicone tubing • Observe the pH of water fine copper wire (20 cm) (5 cm) near the electrodes. 2-cm piece of platinum wire or ring stand • Collect and identify the graphite pencil leads clamps (2) gases that evolve at the silicone putty matches electrodes. wood splints (4) 6-V, 9-V, or 12-V DC source • Draw conclusions about 5-mL disposable graduated wire leads for power source the composition of water. pipettes (2) glass stirring rod

Safety Precautions • Always wear safety goggles and a lab apron. • Use care around flames. • Secure loose clothing and tie back long hair. • Never place the pipettes in your mouth.

Pre-Lab Procedure

1. Write equations for the reactions at each Part A: Electrode Assembly electrode. 1. Cut a plastic graduated pipette into a piece that is Copyright ©Copyright Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, Companies, of the McGraw-Hill a division Inc. 2. Hypothesize about the pH you would expect to 5-cm long. Similarly, cut a piece of surgical observe at each electrode. What ratio of gases do rubber tubing 4-cm long. you expect to observe? Record your hypothesis 2. Thread a length of copper wire through a piece of on page 163. the graduated pipette. Wrap an end of the copper wire around the end of one of the platinum or graphite electrodes, as shown in Figure A, step 1.

Laboratory Manual Chemistry: Matter and Change • Chapter 21 161 162 5. 4. 3. Name electrode graphite Platinum or Sealing theends Step 2 Wrapping thewire Step 1 LAB exposed intheanode. housing toensurethatthecopperwireisnot seal tighter. Siliconputtyisusedintheanode rubber tubingcanbefoldeddoubletomake the joint betweenthesyringetipandpipette. The syringe. Surgical rubbertubing isusedtosealthe whichisthenfitted over theendofa tube, is copperwiremountedinasectionofthepipette serves astheanode. The cathode prepared above, as Note thattheplatinumorgraphiteelectrode, Assemble theelectrodesasshown in shown in as Seal theendsofpipetteusingsiliconputty, length ofpipette. Pull thecopperwireandelectrodeinside Chemistry: Matter andChange 21.1 Figure A, step 2. step Figure A, wire Copper Silicon putty ahd Anode Cathode This istheanode. pipette transfer Polypropylene tubing Surgical Syringe Copper wire • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter21 Figure A Figure B. atB Electrolysis of Water Part B: 4. 3. 2. 1. 8. 7. 6. 5. Syringe bubbles ineitherassembly. the indicatorsolution.Make suretherearenoair pipette tubingandabout1mLofthesyringewith Use thesyringeofeachassemblytofill the few dropsofglycerol. Lubricate theinnerwalls ofthesyringewitha vinegar untilthesolutionturnsgreen. carryoutthesameprocedurewithdiluted is blue, tion untilthesolutionturnsgreen.If Continue addingdilutesodiumbicarbonatesolu- solution totheindicatorandstir. dilute sodiumbicarbonatesolution. Transfer this dipaglassstirringrodin If thesolutionisyellow, until thebromothymolbluehasdissolved. Add afew grainsofsolidbromothymolblue.Stir Place about10mLofwater ina25-mLbeaker. Table 1. ume ofgascollectedateachelectrodein see thatgaseshave accumulated.Recordthevol- Allow theelectrolysis tocontinueuntilyoucan syringes. time toensurethatthegasescollectin withdraw thesyringepistonsfromtimeto sary, The electrodesshouldstarttobubble. Ifneces- electrode. Remember thatthecathodeispositive Connect aDCbatterytotheelectrodes. two clamps. and clamptheminpositionusingaringstand Submerse theelectrodesinbeaker ofwater aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL pipette transfer Polypropylene Surgical tubing (from step2) Anode housing Silicon putty Figure B Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude 2. 1. Data andObservations Hypothesis Name lcrd Cathode( Identity ofgas pH atelectrode(acidorbase) Volume of gas Electrode LAB Applying Concepts Applying Concepts whole number. at thecathodetothatproducedanode?Roundyouransweroff tothenearest Measuring andUsingNumbers Perform thetestsdiscussedinintroductiontoconfirm theidentityofgases. orbasicateachelectrode. neutral, and blueinabasicsolution.Record yellow inanacidicsolution, The indicatorbromothymolblueisgreeninaneutralsolution, 21.1 Is water oxidizedorreducedatthecathode? At theanode? Why? Explain whythisratiohasthevalue ithas. Data Table 1:Measurements andObservations What istheratioofvolume ofthegasproduced Data Table1 whether theelectrolytewas acidic, Anode( ) 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal detergent beforeleaving thelab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlywithsoapor Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofmaterialsasdirectedbyyourteacher. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter21 ) 163 164 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Name Real-World Chemistry valuable asanenergy source?Explainyourchoice. generated fortheelectrolysisofwater. What productoftheelectrolysiswould bemost One suggestedapplicationofsolarenergy istousetheelectricalcurrentthatcan be LAB possible sourcesoferrorinthisactivity? closer together? Why? Predicting voltage? Why? Predicting anode andwhyitdidn’t matteratthecathode. Thinking Critically Thinking Critically Error Analysis Chemistry: Matter andChange 21.1 What would happentotherateofgasproductionifyoumoved theelectrodes What would happentotherateofgasproductionifyouincreased How accuratelydidyou determinethegasvolumes? What were Explain whycarewas taken nottoexpose thecopperwireat Explain thepHchangesyouobserved. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter21 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. E Electroplating aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions cathode inelectroplating? fate solutiontakefroma copper ioninsul- How manyelectronsdoesa Problem Name in ordertosaysomethingaboutthemicroscopicnatureofcopper. Electroplating your hypothesisonpage166. copper atomdepositedatthe cathode?Record you expect topassthroughthecircuitforeach deposited onthecathode.How many electrons do from thecopperanodeforeachatom about how many copperatomsyouexpect tolose formahypothesis above equationstoguideyou, Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Usingthe Write theanodehalf-reactionequation. Write thecathodehalf-reactionequation. LAB lectroplating hasawiderangeofpracticalanddecorative applications. Inthislab,youwillmeasuremacroscopicquantities 21.2 LABORATORY MANUAL • • • Objectives • Compare copper atom. sulfate solutionintoa a copperionin electrons ittakestoturn to calculatehowmany Measure plated atthecathode. by ametalobjectbeing anode tothemassgained mass lostbyacopper tepid water, for15minutes.Thenconsultadoctor. vinegar. Foreye-splashes,eyesshouldbewashedinaneyewash,using flushed withlargeamountofwater, thenneutralizedwithdilute 3 Always wearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. M NaOH isastrong base,andH and and use numbers contrast 3. 2. 1. Part A Procedure the cleaning andplating. key. This willserve asahandleforfurther Attach a5-cmlengthofbarecopperwiretothe and rinsewithtapwater. Wash thekey andcopperanodewithdetergent copper anodewithsteelwool. ing akey. Cleanthesurfaces of the key and These instructionswillassumethatyouareplat- aeClass Date 1-cm metal objectfor Materials 5-cm #20 steel wool detergent solution 3 250-mL beaker 100-mL beakers(2) tweezers M hole) coin withdrilled plating (keyor use asanode copper stripfor ide (NaOH) copper wire sodium hydrox- 2 SO 4 10-cm – is astrong acid.Spillsshouldbe 22 bare paper towels distilled water alligator clips(2) wires forcircuit 12-V DCvariable DC milliamp balance with0.01g small glassrod plating solution 3 • M Chapter21 power supply ammeter precision (H sulfuric acid 2 SO Section 21.3 4 ) Use with 165 166 5. 4. 3. 2. Figure A 1. 5. 4. Name Part B LAB proceeding. Have yourteacherinspectthearrangementbefore connected tothenegative (black)terminal. power supply. The key actsas thecathodeandis tothepositive (red)terminalofthe the ammeter, via plating cell. The copperanodeisconnected, power supplyandammeterinacircuitwiththe connectthe Without switchingthepower on, wire handleandasmallglassrod.See Suspend thekey inthesolutionusingitscopper See copper striptothebeaker usinganalligatorclip. strip tofit over theedgeofbeaker. Securethe bendingthe Place thecopperanodeinbeaker, acidified withalittlesulfuricacid. per sulfate, beaker. The platingsolutionisaofcop- Place 200mLofplatingsolutioninthe250-mL acid. Avoid skincontactwithsulfuric CAUTION: with tweezersandrinsedistilledwater. anode inthesolutionforafew minutes.Remove 100-mL beaker. Immersethekey andcopper Place 30mLof3 hydroxide. Avoid skincontactwithsodium CAUTION: with tweezersandrinsedistilledwater. anode inthesolutionforafew minutes.Remove a 100-mLbeaker. Immersethekey andcopper Place 30mLof3 solution Copper Plating anode Figure A. Chemistry: Matter andChange 21.2 M M clip Alligator sulfuric acidsolutionina sodium hydroxidesolutionin A • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter21 Ammeter Copper wire Beaker Glass rod Figure A. 3. 2. 1. 8. 7. 6. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 7. 6. 5. 4. Part C cuit. steps 2through5ofPart Btoreassemblethecir- follow Without switchingonthepower supply, mass ofthiscathodeassemblyin tothenearest0.001g.Record wire handle, togetherwithitscopper Find themassofkey, 0.001 gandrecorditsmassin Find themassofcopperanodetonearest towel. distilled water andblotdrywithacleanpaper Remove thekey andcopperanode.Rinsewith Turn off thepower supply. utes toprimetheelectrodes. (250 mA). Allow currenttoflow forabout5min- Turn onthepower supplyandadjustitto0.25 A detergent beforeleaving thelab. Wash your handsthoroughlywithsoapor and returneverything toitscorrectplace. rinseanddrythebeakers, Disconnect thecircuit, rect storagebottles. Carefully Repeat steps1and2ofPart C. towel. distilled water andblotdrywithacleanpaper Remove thekey andcopperanode.Rinsewith and recordthefinish time. thenswitchoff thepower supply 30 minutes, Keep thecurrentata steady value forabout adjust thecurrentto0.25 A. neously recordthestarttimeandimmediately andsimulta- steady value. Switch the power on, of thecurrentflow. The currentmustbefixed ata thecurrentandduration to know two things: youneed leave thekey whiletheplatingoccurs, To work outtheactualnumberofelectronsthat aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL return thethreesolutionstotheircor- Data Table1. Data Table1.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Record thevalue ofthecurrentthatyouusedforelectroplating. Data andObservations Name esrmn tr n Difference End Start Time Mass ofkey(cathode) Mass ofcopperanode Measurement LAB opr oyu nwr oqetos2,2,and2c? 2b, compare toyouranswers questions2a, Comparing andContrasting c. b. a. Measuring andUsingNumbers c. b. a. Measuring andUsingNumbers What numberofcopperatomswas lostbytheanode? How many molesofcopperatomswerelost by theanode?Show yourwork. What massofcopperatomswas lostbythecopperanode? (6.02 Multiply thenumberofmolescopperdepositedby Avogadro’s number and includeunits. 63.5 g.How many molesofcopperatomsweredepositedonthekey? Show yourwork whichistosaythat1moleofcopperhasamass The atomicmassofcopperis63.5, What isthedifference betweenthefinal andinitialmassofthekey? 21.2 10 23 atoms/mol 1 ) toobtainthenumberofcopperatomsdepositedonkey. o oyu nwr oqetos1,1,and1c 1b, How doyouranswerstoquestions1a, Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter21 167 168 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB h aso h opraoe fnt whatcouldbesomesourcesoferror? the massofcopperanode?Ifnot, Hypothesizing passing fromthecathodeandnumberofcopperatomsdepositedonkey. Observing andInferring (1.602 milliamps) andthetime(inseconds).Divide thetotalcharge bythecharge onanelectron not the circuitduringelectroplatingisequaltoproductofcurrent(inamps, Measuring andUsingNumbers the numberofatomslostbyanodetothatgainedcathode. Drawing aConclusion in thecircuit.Show yourwork andincludeunits. Error Analysis What aresomeofthebenefits ofelectroplatinganitemwithametal? What aresomeapplicationsforelectroplating? Chemistry: Matter andChange 21.2 10 19 coulombs) tofind thetotalnumberofelectronspassingany arbitrarypoint Make astatementconnectingyourresultstohypothesis. Was theincreaseinmassofkey almostequaltothedecreasein Use youranswerstoquestions1Ð3draw aconclusionrelating Explain therelationshipbetweennumberofelectrons • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter21 h oa hre ncuob,passingany partof incoulombs, The totalcharge, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Isomerism aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual differently? of atomsbearranged Can thesamenumber some organicmolecules? What aretheshapesof Problem Name alkane familyareethane,C C more thanoneisomer. Therearetwostructuralformulasforbutane, atoms, respectively. Alkaneswithmorethanthreecarbon atomshave compounds containchainsoftwocarbonatomsandthree only singlecovalentbondsbetweenthecarbonatoms. in thealkanefamilyaresaidtobesaturated,whichmeanstheyhave family thathaveone,two,three,four, andfivecarbonatoms.Molecules and stereoisomerism. to theirbondangles.Themodelsalsodemonstratestructuralisomerism models areusefultorepresentthearrangementofatomsaccording with twospringsandthreesprings,respectively. single bondsareshownwithsticks,doubleandtriple longer sticksareusedtorepresentcarbon-carbonsinglebonds.While generally usedtoconnectcarbonatomswithhydrogenatoms,while approximate theacceptedbondangles. covalent bondstheywillform.Theholesareboredatanglesthat These ballshaveholesdrilledinthemaccordingtothenumberof helpful. Coloredwoodenorplasticballsareusedtorepresentatoms. molecule arethesame,butspatialarrangementsdifferent. bonded indifferent orders.Instereoisomers,allthebondsin types ofisomersexist.Structuralareonesinwhichtheatoms Isomerism 4 H LAB Methane, CH In thislab,youwillworkwithmodelsofmoleculesfromthealkane While thesizesofatomsarenotproportionatelycorrect, Sticks andspringsareusedtorepresentbonds.Shortsticks To studymoleculesandisomers,chemistsfindtheuseofmodels 10 different structuresandpropertiesarecalledisomers.Two main wo ormoresubstancesthathavethesamemolecularformulabut , andthreestructuralformulasforpentane,C 22.1 4 , hasonecarbonatom.Thenexttwomembersofthe LABORATORY MANUAL 2 H • • • Objectives 6 arranged differently. number ofatomscanbe show thatthesame models Formulate compounds. for severalorganic Draw molecules. shapes ofseveralorganic Compare andcontrast , andpropane,C molecular structures 3 H that 8 . Moleculesofthese 5 H the 12 . aeClass Date protractor ruler wooden orplastic Materials set (ballandstick) molecular model unlined paper pliers sharp pencil aluminum foil • Chapter22 (5 sheets) Section 22.3 Use with 169 170 4. 3. 2. 1. Part A Procedure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Name Safety Precautions LAB for eachelementin and determinethenumberofunpairedelectrons Record theelectronconfiguration ofeachelement recorded foryou.) andiodinehave alreadybeen chlorine, bromine, Label themin andoxygen. nitrogen, hydrogen, balls ascarbon, identify thedifferent colored tron configurations, On thebasisofnumberholesandelec- andiodine. chlorine, bromine, oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen, configurations forcarbon, writeouttheelectron On anothersheetofpaper, Table 1. ently coloredballs.Recordyouranswersin Count thenumberofholespresentindiffer- sents thepotentialforasinglechemicalbond. Each holethathasbeenboredintotheballrepre- your hypotheses. Summarize theproceduresyouwillfollow totest isomers. Recordyourhypothesisonpage171. in acompoundwillaffect thenumberofpossible how theincreasein numberofcarbonatoms hypothesis abouttheshapesofhydrocarbonsand Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a will hydrogennormallyforminacompound? form inacompound?How many covalent bonds How many covalent bondswillcarbonnormally Define covalent bond. What istheelectronconfiguration ofhydrogen? What istheelectronconfiguration ofcarbon? Chemistry: Matter andChange 22.1 Data Table1. Data Table1. • • (The colorsof Be careful nottopinch your skinwiththepliers. Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter22 Data Part B 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Part C shape ofthemodel. from balltoball.)Notetheregular geometric perimeter ofyourmodel.(Stretchthefoiltightly Wrap asheetofaluminumfoilaroundtheoutside Compare themodelwithstructuraldiagram. CH Construct amodelofmethane, axis. rotate thecarbonatomsaround thecarbon-carbon Hold oneblackballineach hand. Attempt to formula forethane. draw thestructural On anothersheetofpaper, C Construct amodelofethane, disassemble themodel. After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, Use aprotractortomeasuretheangleformed. intersect. Remove themodelandextend thelinesuntilthey black (carbon)ball. connecting theyellow (hydrogen)ballstothe to tracetheangleformedbytwo sticks useasharppencil On acleansheetofpaper, ball andtwo yellow ballsaretouchingthepaper. sheet ofunlinedpapersothattheblack(carbon) stick. Placetheremainderofmodelonaclean Remove theorange(bromine)ballanditswooden shapes ofmethaneandbromomethane. bromine. Noteany differences inthegeneral ball witharepresentingthehalogen, one oftheyellow (hydrogen) balls.Replacethe Now youwillconstruct bromomethane.Remove ua oml o ehn,witno ae,is writtenonpaper, tural formulaformethane, aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL H — H H C — H 2 H 6 . 4 . The struc- . The

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. Name Part D alclro oe dniyo lmn lcrncniuainunpaired electrons Electron configuration Identityofelement ofholes Ball color upeiodine chlorine bromine Black Purple Blue Green Yellow Orange Red LAB the model? Observing andInferring assemble themodels. dis- After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, label itwiththecorrectIUPAC name. Draw thestructuralformulaforeachisomerand C Construct two different modelsofbutane, assemble themodels. dis- After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, Draw structuraldiagramsofthesemolecules. C Construct two different modelsofchloropropane, assemble themodels. dis- After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, Draw thestructuralformulaforpropane. C Construct amodelofpropane, 3 H 7 Cl. 22.1 Number How doesthestructuraldiagramofmethanecomparewith 3 H 8 . 4 H Data Table 1 10 . 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 6. 5. 4. Neatly reassemblethemodelkit. balls. Be sureallstickshave beenremoved fromthe disassemble themodels. After yourteacherhaschecked yourwork, label itwiththecorrectIUPAC name. Draw thestructuralformulaforeachisomerand C Construct threedifferent isomersofpentane, 5 H aeClass Date 12 . LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter22 Number of 171 172 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB students inyourclass. Are theisomerssameordifferent? Describeany differences. in analkaneandthenumberofpossibleisomers. Drawing aConclusion values. 109.5¡. Account forany differences inthetwo molecule totheacceptedbondangle, Measuring andUsingNumbers bromomethane. Observing andInferring Observing andInferring wrapped withaluminumfoil. Observing andInferring Error Analysis the ground? air andwhichgaswould youexpect tosettle gas products—mightyouexpect toriseinthe air atSTP. Which gas—naturalgasorbottle- andbutane withthatof propane, of methane, products. Researchandcomparethedensities while propaneandbutane areusedasbottle-gas Methane isthemajorcomponentofnaturalgas, Chemistry: Matter andChange 22.1 Compare yourisomersofbutane andpentanewiththeisomersofother Describe therelationshipbetweennumberofcarbonatoms Compare theshapesofmodelsmethaneand Describe therotationinmodelofethane. Describe thegeometricshapeofmethanemodelwhenitis • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter22 Compare themeasuredbondangleinmethane 2. gasoline? atoms inany ofthemoleculesthatmake up be fewer orgreaterthanthenumberofcarbon the numberofcarbonspertypicalmoleculeto mixture ofhydrocarbons. Would youexpect liquid atroomtemperature.Paraffin wax isa have between4and 12carbonatoms.Itis Gasoline isamixtureofalkanesthatgenerally aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. H The RipeningofFruitwithEthene aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name the effect ofetheneon the ripeningoffruit. produced inrelativelylowconcentrationsthis activity. You willtest very dangerousinhighconcentrations,youwill beusingnaturalethene gas-tight chambers. ripening processstartsbyexposingtheunripefruittoetheneinspecial cannot bestopped.Generally, fruitispickedwhilegreen andthe slowed byrefrigeration;however, onceetheneisproduced,theprocess rotten andinediblebythetimeyoupurchaseit.Ripeningmaybe until allthefruitisripebeforetheyshipittostores,muchwillbe ripening cyclescanbeobserved.However, iffarmersandgrowerswait kept ontheplantandallowedtoripen,fulldevelopment fruit bybreakingdownpectinincellwalls. starch andacidsofunripefruitintosugars.Theenzymesalsosoften and toripenfruits.Ethenestimulatesenzymesintheplantsconvert produce etheneasahormonetostimulateflowerandseedproduction alkenes actashormonesandcontrolbiologicalfunctions.Plants reactive thanalkanes. unsaturated. Thisunsaturationmakesalkenesandalkynesmore multiple bondsbetweentwoadjacentcarbonatomsandaresaidtobe are verystableandgenerallyunreactive.Alkenesalkyneshave alkanes haveonlysinglebondsandaresaidtobesaturated.Alkanes carbon andhydrogen.Therearethreefamiliesofhydrocarbons.The change? Hydrocarbonsprovidetheanswer. sweet. Whathappenedduringtheripeningprocesstocausethis ripe applesmaybecolorsotherthanred.Thefleshissofterandtastes everything isdifferent. Suchanapplegenerallyappearsred,although the fleshmaytastesour. However, whenyoueataripeapple, The RipeningofFruitwithEthene LAB Ethene isacolorless,odorless,andtastelessgas. Althoughitcanbe The plantproducesetheneduringitsgrowthcycle.Ifthefruitis Several alkenesoccurnaturallyinlivingorganisms.Someofthese Hydrocarbons arethesimplestorganiccompounds,containingonly ave youevertriedtoeatanunripeapple?Suchapplemay appear green,havehardflesh,andalmostnotaste.Infact, 22.2 LABORATORY MANUAL aeClass Date • Chapter22 Section 22.2 Use with 173 174 Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name at whichfruitripens? What factorsaffect the rate Problem 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB self-sealing plasticbagand sealit. Place thesecondpaperplate andbananasina placed inabag. The bananasonplatenumber 1willnotbe Data Table1. much detailaspossibleontheDay-1linein appearance andfirmness ofeachgroupinas Examine eachgroupofbananas.Recordthe plate. Place eachgroupofthreebananasonapaper or unattachedatthestems. bananas inallthreegroupsareeitherattached groups ofthreebananaseach.Besurethe same degree. Divide thebananasintothree Pick outninebananasthatareunripetothe Number theplates1through3. Label thethreepaperplateswithyourname. Record yourhypothesisinthenext column. hypothesis aboutwhichbananaswillripenfirst. Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a How willyouknow whenthebananasareripe? chemical? Why shoulditbereactive? What isthestructuralformulaforthis fruit? What istheactive chemicalintheripeningof Chemistry: Matter andChange 22.2 • • • • • Objectives faster orslower. may causefruittoripen Design experiments fruit. source ofetheneripens Observe closed systems. fruit ripeninginopenand Compare Never eatortasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter22 how anatural and contrast that Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 10. 7. 3. 2. 1. 9. 8. a self-sealingplasticbagandsealit. andbananasin apple, number 3.Placetheplate, Place aripeapplewiththebananasonplate Clean upyourwork area. Return alllabequipmentto itsproperplace. container. Place allmaterialsintheappropriatewaste bananas have ripened. Record yourobservations eachdayuntilallthe teacher. open thebagsunlessinstructedtodosobyyour on theDay-2linesin ness ofeachgroupinasmuchdetailpossible bananas again.Recordtheappearanceandfirm- examine eachofthegroups On day2, an areadesignatedbyyourteacher. Place allthreeplatesofbananassidebyin aeClass Date paper plates(3) self-sealing plastic ripe apple unripe bananas(9) Materials bags (2) LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table1. Do not

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Name a lt lt Plate3 Plate2 Plate1 Day 10 LAB 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 22.2 Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter22 175 176 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB they thesame? What maybesomereasonsfordifferences? ripening process? Designing anExperiment/Identifying Variables bananas ripeneven faster? Designing anExperiment/Identifying Variables or plate1? Drawing aConclusion Drawing aConclusion of fruit? Comparing andContrasting closed container? Observing andInferring Error Analysis ship ripebananasorgreen bananas? Why? for shipmentwas 8days. Will youchooseto Puerto RicotoNew York andthetimerequired Suppose youwanted toship bananasfrom Chemistry: Matter andChange 22.2 Compare yourresultswiththoseofotherstudentsin yourclass. Are Why didthebananasonplate3ripenfaster thanthoseonplate2 Why didthebananasonplate2ripenfaster thanthoseonplate1? Why was plate1allowed tobeopenandplate2kept ina What differences wereobserved betweenthethreeplates • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter22 2. How couldyouhave madethe How couldyouhave slowed the statement maybetrue? Why? doyou thinkthe results ofyourexperiment, Basedonthe will spoilthewholebarrel.” You mayhave heardthe saying“Onebadapple aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. C Carbohydrates The Characterization of aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual ing sugar? sugar andproduceareduc- hydrolyze anonreducing sugars? Howcanyou reducing andnonreducing test todistinguishbetween How canyouuseacolor Problem Name and nonreducingsugarsistheBenedict the reaction.Acommonchemicaltesttodistinguishbetweenreducing classify sugarsbecausethesecompoundsreducetheotherchemicalin nonreducing sugarcannotbeoxidized.Theterm ability tobeoxidized.Areducingsugariseasilyoxidized,anda Examples ofpolysaccharidesarestarch,glycogen,andcellulose. units andyieldmanyindividualmonosaccharidesuponhydrolysis. maltose, andsucrose.Polysaccharidesarepolymersofmonosaccharide monosaccharides uponhydrolysis.Examplesofdisaccharidesarelactose, Disaccharides containtwomonosaccharideunitsandyield monosaccharides areglucose,ribose,deoxyribose,andfructose. broken downintosimplersugarsuponhydrolysis.Examplesof they arehydrolyzed.Monosaccharidessimplesugarsthatcannotbe glucose units. structural material.Starchandcellulosearebothpolymersmadeupof form ofstarchforenergystorage,andinthecellulose a processcalledphotosynthesis.Plantsproducecarbohydratesinthe Carbohydrates aresynthesizedchieflybychlorophyll-containingplantsin atoms intheworldareformofcarbohydratemolecules. animals. Itisestimatedthatmorethanhalfofalltheorganiccarbon hydrolysis. Carbohydratesareofmajorimportancetobothplantsand will bereducedtocoppermetalifareducingsugarispresent. Carbohydrates The Characterization of LAB Sugars canbeclassifiedasreducingornonreducingbasedupontheir Carbohydrates areclassifiedbasedupontheproductsformedwhen arbohydrates areeitherpolyhydroxyaldehydesorketones, compounds thatwillyieldpolyhydroxyaldehydesorketonesupon 23.1 LABORATORY MANUAL • • Objectives sugars toreducingsugars. Convert sugars usingacolortest. sugars fromnonreducing Distinguish nonreducing ’ s test.Inthistest,copper(II)ion reducing reducing aeClass Date is usedto concentrated Benedict 2% starchsolution 2% fructose 2% sucrosesolution 2% glucose Materials (1 mL) sulfuric acid (30 mL) (20 mL) solution (20mL) (20 mL) solution (20mL) ’ s solution beaker tongs dropper stirring rod test-tube rack test tubes(8) 10-mL graduated 250-mL beaker hot plate boiling chips red litmuspaper 6 • M Chapter23 cylinder ide (NaOH)(5mL) sodium hydrox- Section 23.4 Use with 177 178 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name LAB Benedict’s solutioncontainsanoxidizing agent any colorchangesorprecipitatethatformed. Record yourobservations in and placetheminthetest-tube racktocool. remove thetesttubes After 5minutesofheating, same time. 5 minutes. The foursamplesmaybeheatedatthe test tubeintheboiling-water bathandheatfor each solutionuntilthoroughlymixed. Placeeach Benedict’s solution toeachtesttubeandshake numbered1through4. Add 4mLof test tube, andstarchintotheappropriately labeled sucrose, fructose, Place 5mLofthesolutionsglucose, 8-starch Test tube8: 7-sucrose Test tube7: 6-starch Test tube6: 5-sucrose Test tube5: 4-starch Test tube4: 3-sucrose Test tube3: 2-fructose Test tube2: 1-glucose Test tube1: Label eighttesttubesasfollows: plate. Heatthewater untilitstartsboiling. chips tothewater andplacethebeaker onthehot water toa250-mLbeaker. Add afew boiling Set upaboiling-water bathbyadding150mLof Record yourhypothesisinthenext column. the foursugarswithBenedict’s solution. hypothesis aboutwhatwillhappenwhenyoumix Read over theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a hydrolysis products? whatarethe When youhydrolyzecellulose, the Benedict’s test? What canbelearnedaboutsugarsbyperforming carbohydrates? What arethethreemajorclassesof Chemistry: Matter andChange 23.1 Data Table1. • • • Hot itemsmaynotappeartobehot. Never eatortasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. Always wearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalabapron. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter23 Note 5. Hypothesis 7. 6. The samplesmaybeheatedatthesametime. the boiling-water bathandheatfor3minutes. stir tomixthoroughly. Placethetesttubesinto concentrated sulfuricacidtoeachsolutionand starch intotesttubes5and6. Add 2dropsof Place 10mLofsucrosesolutionand in test-tube racktocool.Recordyourobservations remove thetesttubesandplacein heating, tube intheboiling-water bath. After 5minutesof shake untilthoroughlymixed. Placeeachtest Benedict’s solutiontoeachtesttubeandstiror the starchsolutionintotesttube8. Add 4mLof the sucrosesolutionintotesttube7and5mLof place5mLof When thetwo solutionsarebasic, your observations in each solutionwithredlitmuspaperandrecord testadropfrom and stir. Usingastirringrod, 15 dropsof6 carefullyadd After the3-minuteheatingperiod, duce aprecipitateisnegative test. that doesnotchangecolororpro- for thepresenceofareducingsugar. A solution precipitate ofany ofthesecolorsisapositive test oryellow precipitate. A green, brown, brick-red, resultingina that willreactwithreducingsugars, mus paper. that thesolutionisbasicbytestingitwithredlit- untilyoudetermine stirring aftereachaddition, addNaOHonedropatatime, paper remainsred, thesolutionisbasic.If turns thepaperblue, Data Table3. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL M NaOH solutiontoeachtesttube Data Table2. If asolution

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Name ua ouin(L ufrcai dos AmountofNaOH (drops) sulfuricacid(drops) solution(mL) starch sucrose Observations Sugar fructose glucose sucrose Volume ofBenedict’s solution(mL) starch Sugar ua oueo eeitsslto m)Observations sucrose Volume ofBenedict’s solution(mL) starch Sugar LAB sugars thatarereducingand thosethatarenonreducing? Comparing andContrasting sugars andwhichcontainednonreducingsugars? Observing andInferring waste container. Place allchemicalsinanappropriatelylabeled contents. hot plate. Allow ittocoolbeforeemptyingthe Use beaker tongstoremove thebeaker from the Turn off thehotplateandallow ittocool. 23.1 oueo Amountofconcentrated Volume of Data Table 3:Benedict’s Test ofHydrolyzed Solutions Which ofthesolutionsthatyoutestedcontainedreducing What observed differences werefoundbetweenthose Data Table 1:Benedict’s Test Data Table 2:Hydrolysis 5. 4. the lab. thoroughly withsoapordetergent beforeleaving Clean upyourwork areaandwash yourhands Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter23 179 180 6. 5. 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB the Benedict’s test? Was thisexpected? Thinking Critically using theBenedict’s test? Was thisexpected? Thinking Critically ing thehydrolysisofstarch. Drawing aConclusion Error Analysis sweeter thetastebecomes.Explainwhatishappening. the thelongerpastaremainsinyourmouth, little taste.However, thereisvery When youplaceapieceofuncooked pastainyourmouth, the typesofsugars? Why would youwant touseacolor-change testtodistinguishbetween Chemistry: Matter andChange 23.1 What possiblesourcesoferrormightaccountforunexpected results? Were reducingsugarsfoundinthehydrolyzedsucrosesolutionusing Were reducingsugarsdetectedinthehydrolyzedstarchsolution Write aword chemicalequationtodescribewhathappeneddur- • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter23 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. P Polymerization Reactions aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name — (a diol),apolyesterwillresult: dicarboxylic acid)andifthealcoholhastwohydroxylfunctionalgroups amine, asinRCOCl preparing amidesisthereactionofacarboxylic-acid chloridewithan polyamide withmanyamidefunctionalgroups. Acommonmethodfor anhydride ethylene glycolaretheAandBunitsofA-B polymer:phthalic reacts, resultingintheformationofapolyester. Phthalicacidand react similarlytothewayphthalicacid(1,2-benzenedicarboxylicacid) diol, withphthalicanhydride.Inthisactivity, phthalic anhydridewill carboxylic acidwithanalcohol.RCOOH groups. Onetechniqueforpreparinganesterisbythereactionofa name A-B-. in analternatingpattern.Thissequencemayberepresentedas-A-B-A-B- Other polymerscontainchainsoftwodifferent monomersthatarrange monomer. Thesemayberepresentedbythesequence-A-A-A-A-A-A-A-. molecules calledmonomers. polymer moleculeisattainedbytherepeatedattachmentofsmaller proteins, nucleicacids,polysaccharides,andrubber. Thelargesizeofa fibers, suchasnylonandpolyesters.Naturallyoccurringpolymersinclude atomic massunits.Syntheticpolymersincludeplasticsandsynthetic masses ofpolymericmoleculesrangefromthousandstomillions atomic hydrogenhasamassofoneunit).Themolecular compounds isonlyafewhundredatomicmassunits(forreference, size ofthepolymermolecules.Themolecularmassmostorganic can form: each monomerhastwo reactive sites,alongchainofalternatingunits Hexamethyenediamine is alsoknownas1,6-diaminohexane.Because hexamethylenediamine, acompoundwithtwo amine groups. compound withtwocarbonyl-halogenfunctional groups,with — Polymerization Reactions HN(CH [ OOC [ LAB If thecarboxylicacidhastwocarboxylfunctionalgroups(a In thesecondpartofthisactivity, youwillpreparenylon,whichisa In thepreparationofpolyester, youwillreactethyleneglycol,a In thefirstpartofthisactivity, youwillprepareapolyester. Asthe Polymers canbemadefrommanyrepeatingunitsofthesame In thepreparationofnylon,youwillreactadipoyl chloride,a difference betweenpolymersandotherorganiccompoundsisthe olymers areexamplesoforganiccompounds.However, themain polyester — R 2 ) n — 6 23.2 ClOC(CH NHOC(CH COO ethylene glycol implies, thispolymercontainsmanyesterfunctional — R 2 ) 2 LABORATORY MANUAL — 4 R ] ) COCl 4 n O] CO NH — 2 n 0 H 0 n 2 n n O. RCONHR H polyester. HOOC n 2 N(CH H 2 O. — 2 ) R 6 NH — R HCl. COOH OH 2 0 0 RCOOR n HO — aeClass Date R — H 2 OH O 0 • Chapter23 Section 23.5 Use with 181 182 1. Preparation ofaPolyester Part A: Procedure 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions • • Objectives polyester andapolyamide? How canyoumakea Problem Name hexamethylenediamine. adipoyl chlorideand Prepare ethylene glycol. phthalic anhydrideand Prepare LAB Data Table1. a pieceofweighingpaper. Recordthisvalue in measurethemassof Using alaboratorybalance, why not. explain you thinkapolyestercannotbeformed, draw thestructuralformula.If can beformed, the two moleculesshown below? Ifapolyester Can apolyesterbeformedfromthereactionof ylene glycol. you willpreparefromphthalicanhydrideandeth- Draw thestructuralformulaforpolymerthat join. Recordyourhypothesesonpage183. sequence thatwillbeformedwhenthemonomers a secondhypothesisaboutthetypeofpolymer functional groupspresentineachmonomer. Form hypothesis aboutthenumberandidentityof Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a Chemistry: Matter andChange 23.2 a polyamidefrom a polyesterfrom H 3 CO H CCOOH Place 2.0gofphthalicanhydride • • • • • • • • Avoid breathing insodiumacetatevapors Turn offwhennotinuse. theBunsenburner Hot objectswillnotappeartobehot. Do notheatbroken, chipped,orcrackedglassware. occluded liquidthatformdonotburstandsquirtonskinorclothing. Handle thenylonwithextreme cautionsothatanysmallbubblesof chloride, orhexamethylenediamine. Avoid skincontactwithsodiumhydroxide, phthalicanhydride,adipoyl Always wearsafetygoggles,gloves,andalabapron. Conduct thislabunderafumehood. copper wire scissors 20% sodiumhydroxide(NaOH) 5% aqueoussolutionof 50% aqueousethanol(10mL) 5% adipoylchloridein ethylene glycol(1mL) sodium acetate(0.1g) phthalic anhydride(2.0g) Materials 3 (1 mL) hexamethylenediamine (25mL) cyclohexane (25mL) COH • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter23 4. 3. 2. ture gentlyfor5additional minutes. mixture appearstoboil.Continue toheatthemix- and heatgentlyusingaBunsen burner untilthe Clamp thetesttubetoaring standusingaclamp the contents. Data Table1. glycol intoatesttube.Recordtheamountusedin 10-mL graduatedcylinder andplacetheethylene Measure 1.0mLofethyleneglycolusingaclean ing thephthalicanhydride. Place thesodiumacetateintesttubecontain- acetate andrecordthisvalue in combined mass.Calculatethemassofsodium acetate ontheweighingpaperandrecord mass in a secondpieceofweighingpaperandrecordthe measurethemassof Using alaboratorybalance, Place thephthalicanhydrideinacleantesttube. phthalic anhydrideandrecordthisvalue aswell. mass in on theweighingpaperandrecordcombined aeClass Date Data Table1. Data Table1. LABORATORY MANUAL weighing papers(2) balance striker ormatches Bunsen burner clamp ring stand 150-mL beakers(2) 50-mL graduatedcylinder 10-mL graduatedcylinder test-tube rack test tube — Shake thetesttubegentlytomix respiratory irritant. Place 0.1gofsodium Calculate themassof Data Table1.

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. Name atB Preparation ofNylon Part B: LAB beaker usingyourstirring rod.Placethesolid Wash the solidwithwater andremove itfromthe waste container. graduated cylinder. Pouroff theliquid intothe aqueous ethanol.Measure the ethanolwitha Wash theresultingsolidwith10mL of50% off theremainingliquidintowaste container. the stirringrodtoformadditionalpolymer. Pour Vigorously stirtheremainderofmixture with air dry. beaker andplaceonpapertowels andallow to with water. Then remove therope from the 150-mL beaker andrinsetheropeseveral times using apairofscissors.Placetheropein Cut thepolymeratliquid-liquidinterface duces alongrope. so thatthepolymerformscontinuouslyandpro- mer film atitscenteranddraw itslowly upward snagthepoly- from thewalls ofthebeaker. Then, gentlypullthepolymerstrings a hookattheend, two liquidlayersmeet.Usingacopperwirewith A polymerfilm willimmediatelyformwherethe two layerswillform. down theinclinedside. Ifthisisdonecarefully, amine andpouringtheadipoyl chloridesolution tilting thebeaker containingthehexamethylenedi- methylenediamine. This can bestbedoneby the insidewall ofthebeaker containingthehexa- Carefully pourtheadipoyl chloridesolutiondown of dropsused. to thisbeaker andmixgently. Recordthenumber Table 2. 150-mL beaker. Recordtheamountusedin Pour thissolutionintoadifferent ure 25mLofthehexamethylenediamine solution. Clean thegraduatedcylinder anduseittomeas- the volume usedin hexane andpouritintoa150-mLbeaker. Record 25 mLofasolutionadipoyl chlorideincyclo- measure Using aclean50-mLgraduatedcylinder, rod. Recordyourobservations. ness andviscosityofthepolymerusingastirring testthebrittle- has cooledtoroomtemperature, off thegasflow totheburner. When thetesttube turn Once the5-minuteheatingperiodhasended, 23.2 Add 10dropsof20%sodiumhydroxide Data Table2. Data 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 1. Data andObservations 4. 3. Volume ofethyleneglycol(mL) Mass ofsodiumacetate(g) Mass ofweighingpaper(g) weighing paper(g) Mass ofsodiumacetateand Mass ofphthalicanhydride(g) Mass ofweighingpaper(g) weighing paper(g) Mass ofphthalicanhydrideand containers. Place allchemicalsinappropriatelylabeledwaste all hotitemstocool. Turn off thegastoBunsenburner andallow mer prepared. Describe theviscosityandbrittlenessofpoly- with soapordetergent before leaving thelab. Clean upyourwork areaandwash yourhands Return allequipmenttoitsproperplace. record yourobservations. examine themand samples ofnylon have dried, onto apapertowel andallow ittodry. Onceyour Data Table 1:Preparation ofaPolyester aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter23 183 184 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry (number ofdrops) Volume ofNaOHsolution hexamethylenedianmine (mL) Volume of solution (mL) Volume ofadipoylchloride 2. 1. LAB ously orforalongertime? would youexpect to happen totheviscosityofyourpolymerifyouheateditmorevigor- Drawing aConclusion amino acidsarejoined. acids areshown below. Predictthestructureofmolecule thatwillformwhenthesetwo joins aminoacidsissimilartothereactionusedinpreparationofnylon. Two amino Predicting appearance ofthenylon. Comparing andContrasting Error Analysis mer containeroraglasscontainer? Why? Would you prefertokeep yourmilkinapoly- work aswellnylon formakingstockings? Why would thepolyester thatyouformednot Data Table 2:Preparation ofNylon Chemistry: Matter andChange 23.2 Amino acidsarethemonomericunitsthatmake upproteins. The reactionthat What sourcesoferrorcouldaccountforunusualresults? H 2 NCH Consider whathappenedtothepolyesterasyouheatedit. What 2 OHH COOH Compare theappearanceofpolyesterwith • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter23 2 NCH(CH 2. 3. Describe theappearanceofnylon. fiber? how many monomer unitsarepresentinthis approximately 12000amu. Approximately A typicalnylon fiber hasamolecularmassof 3 )COOH aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. H Denaturation aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions denaturation? once itundergoes properties ofaprotein What happenstothe Problem Name the temperature. Denaturing willbeaccomplishedbyloweringthepHandincreasing egg isboiledorfried. example ofdenaturationisthehardeninganeggwhitewhen are methodsofdenaturingorchangingthenatureprotein.An protein moleculesinsolution.TheadditionofheatoradecreasepH the protein. are disrupted,resultinginachangeofthethree-dimensionalshape When thepHisloweredortemperatureraised,theseattractions Denaturation What isacontrolinanexperiment? become denatured. State two conditionsthat mightcauseaproteinto Briefly explain denaturation. LAB In thisactivity, eggwhitesareusedasanexampleof aprotein. Denaturation isatermusedtodescribethechangeofstructure ydrogen bondsandotherintermolecularattractionsareimportant in retainingthethree-dimensionalstructureofcertainproteins. 24.1 LABORATORY MANUAL • • • • • • • • Objectives due toloweringofpH. properties ofaprotein Observe due toheat. properties ofaprotein Observe Use gloveswhenhandlingraweggwhites. Sodium hydroxide iscaustic. Hydrochloric acid,sulfuricandaceticacidare corrosive toskin. Hot objectsmaynotappeartobehot. Dispose ofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. Always wearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. the changein the changein 4. protein. Recordyourhypothesis onpage186. the temperaturewillhave onthepropertiesof a about theeffect thatlowering thepHorraising Read theentireactivity andformahypothesis aeClass Date Bunsen burner egg white 2 white vinegar, 5% 2 2 Materials M M M ide (NaOH) (HC acetic acid acid (HCl) (H sodium hydrox- hydrochloric sulfuric acid 2 SO 2 H 4 3 ) O 2 ) striker ormatches test-tube rack test tubes(6) wire gauze ring ring stand labels (6) stirring rods(5) 10-mL graduated • Chapter24 cylinder Section 24.1 Use with 185 186 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 10. Procedure Name 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. ettb ubrTetetImdaeosrainObservation 24hlater Immediateobservation Treatment Test-tube number LAB it becamedenatured? Observing andInferring record thisinformationin Observe whathappensineachtesttubeand serves asthecontrol. add10mLofwater. This tube To testtube6, Remove testtube5fromtheboilingwater. in for5min. hot-water bathwhenthewater boilsandleave it Set upahot-water bath.Placetesttube5inthe hydroxide (NaOH)andstir. add10mLof2 To testtube4, add10mLofvinegar andstir. To testtube3, (H add10mLof2 To testtube2, acid (HCl)andstirusingastirringrod. add10mLof2 To testtube1, test tubes. Pour 2mLofegg whiteintoeachofsixclean through on eachlabelandnumberthetesttubes Affix labelstosixtesttubes.Placeyourname 2 SO Chemistry: Matter andChange 24.1 control heat NaOH vinegar 6 5 HCl 4 3 2H 1 4 ) andstir. 6 . Placethetesttubesinarack. 2 SO Data Table1. What changeofappearance didtheegg whiteundergo when 4 M M M sodium sulfuric acid hydrochloric • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter24 1 Data Table 1 Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 12. 11. 1. 4. 3. 2. teacher. Dispose ofchemicalsasinstructedbyyour Table 1. test tubeandrecordthisinformationin observe whathappenedineach After 24hours, directed byyourteacher. as Place thetesttubesinasecureplace, down thedrain. drain. Neutralizeexcess NaOHandflushit Neutralize excess acidandflushitdown the lab. Wash yourhandsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB What possiblesourcesoferrormightaccountforunusualresults? Drawing aConclusion denaturation? Drawing aConclusion Predicting tein? Observing andInferring Observing andInferring appearance oftheegg white? Observing andInferring Error Analysis marinate fish inthepreparationofseviche? Why arelemonjuicesorlimeusedto thatwas firm andopaque. calledaseviche, fish, seafood withcitrusjuicesproduceda“cooked” Ecuador discovered thatcombininglocal The native peopleoftheregions ofPeruand 24.1 What was thefunctionoftesttube6? Compare theresultsofthislabwithpredictionsyourhypothesis. What happenstothepropertiesofaproteinwhenitundergoes Why was asecondsetofdatarecordedafter24hours? What typeofpHchangeresultsinthedenaturationprotein? Which substancescausedapermanentchangeinthe How didatemperaturechangeaffect theproperties ofthepro- 2. transport oxygen? hemoglobin inbloodtobecomeunable Why mightthelowering ofbloodpHcausethe aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter24 187

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. P Saturated andUnsaturated Fats aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Name In thisformula,R,R and/or doublecovalentbonds. between adjacentcarbonatomsmayconsistofcombinationssingle may containasmanythreedifferent fattyacids;and(c)thebonding fatty acidchainsmayvaryfrom14to24carbonatoms;(b)atriglyceride glycerol andthreemoleculesoffattyacids. glycerol. Eachmoleculeofatriglycerideismadefromone triglycerides. Triglycerides areestersoflongchaincarboxylicacidsand Animals usethestoredenergywhenfoodsourcesarenotavailable. seeds isusedtosupportrapidgrowthoftheyoungplantaftergermination. the iodinewillberetained whenthesolutionisaddedtoasaturatedfat. an iodinesolutionisadded toanunsaturatedfat.Thered-browncolor of of unsaturationinfats. The red-browncolorofiodinewilldisappearwhen CHI-R double bonds.ThereactionmaybeshownasI properties. Halogenscanbeeasilyaddedtofats thatcontaincarbon-carbon fatty acidsandgenerallycomefromanimalsources. fatty acids.Fats,suchasbutterandlard,contain anabundanceofsaturated or cornoil,usuallycomefromplantsourcesand containmainlyunsaturated temperature andfatsaresolidatroomtemperature. Oils,suchasoliveoil acid arethemostabundantunsaturatedfattyacidsfoundinoils. saturated fattyacidsfoundinfats.Oleicacid,linoleicandlinolenic acid chain.Polyunsaturatedfatscontainseveraldoublebonds. attached. Unsaturatedfatscontainonedoublebondinthefatty is saidtobeunsaturated,thatis,morehydrogenatomscan chains. Afattyacidwithoneormoredoublebondsinthechain can beattached.Saturatedfatscontainonlysaturatedfattyacid carbon atomsofthechaincontainallhydrogenthat between carbonatoms.Theterm groups maybeidenticaltoordifferent fromeachother. Saturated andUnsaturated Fats LAB The generalformulaforatriglycerideisshownattheright. The formulaforatriglyceridemayvarybecause(a)thelengthof Organisms storeenergyasfatsandoils,whicharemixturesof In thisactivity, iodinesolution isusedtodetectandestimatethedegree Saturated andunsaturatedfattyacidshavedifferent chemical The maindifference between oilsandfatsisthatareliquidatroom Lauric, myristic,palmitic,andstearicfattyacidsmakeupmostofthe In asaturatedfattyacid,onlysinglebondsarefound substances. Thestoredenergyisusedlater. Theenergystoredinplant lants andanimalsbothstoreenergyinthebondsofchemical . 24.2 , andR LABORATORY MANUAL represent fattyacidchains.These saturated indicates thatthe 2 R-CH aeClass Date CH-R 0 R-CHI- General formulaforatriglyceride CH CH CH 2 2 • Chapter24 O O O O O O C C C Section 24.3 R R R Use with 189 Problem 190 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Procedure 4. 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions sample triglycerides? unsaturated fattyacidsin amount ofsaturatedand What istherelative Name LAB ring rodbetweeneachtube. tube toevenly distribute theiodine.Cleanstir- stirthecontentsofeachtest Using astirringrod, Add 3dropsoftinctureiodinetoeachtesttube. the solidfats melt. test tubes.Heatalltubesinahotwater bathuntil specified fat oroiltoeachoftheremainingeight As detailedin test tube. Test tube1isacontrol. Add 1mLofwater tothis each labelandnumberthetesttubes Affix labelstoninetesttubes.Placeyournameon acid. Recordyourhypothesisinthenext column. used topredictthedegree ofsaturationafatty about how achangein colorofahalogencanbe Read over theentireactivity. Form ahypothesis unsaturated hydrocarbon. Write anequationtoshow iodinereactingwithan an oil? What aretwo maindifferences betweenafat and and apolyunsaturatedfat aredifferent. anunsaturatedfat, Explain how asaturated fat, Chemistry: Matter andChange 24.2 Data Table1, • • • • • • • Objectives add 1mLofeach of triglycerides. unsaturation insamples amount ofsaturationor Determine urated fats. saturated fatsandunsat- Differentiate Iodine istoxic. Tincture ofiodinemaybeatissueirritant. Broken glassware caneasilypuncture orsliceskin. Dispose ofchemicalwastesasdirected byyourteacher. Always wearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter24 1 through the relative between 9 . 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 7. 6. pletely gone. of iodinecolor;and2 lab. Wash your handsthoroughlybeforeleaving the Report any broken ordamagedequipment. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofchemicalsasinstructedbyyour where3isthemostunsaturated. 3, the colorchanges.Useanarbitraryscaleof1to Determine thedegree ofunsaturationbasedon 0 Table 1, at 1-minuteintervals for 3minutes.In the rackandbegin observingthecolorchanges returnthetesttubesto Using atest-tubeholder, aeClass Date no fading ofiodinecolor;1 vegetable butter coconut oil glass stirringrod dropper 10-mL graduated test-tube rack test tubes(9) Materials shortening cylinder record yourobservations usingthiscode: LABORATORY MANUAL color ofiodinecom- hot plate test-tube holder 600-mL beaker tincture ofiodine linseed oil soybean oil cottonseed oil corn oil olive oil some fading Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. ObservingandInferring 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations Name ettb ClratrClratrClratrunsaturation Colorafter Colorafter Colorafter Test-tube LAB Thinking Critically color changeoftheiodine? Observing andInferring indicate aboutthebondpatternsofsubstancestested? Observing andInferring Observing andInferring ubrMtra etd1mn(–)2mn(–)3mn(–)(1–3) 3min(0–2) 2min(0–2) 1min(0–2) Materialtested number meltedvegetable meltedbutter linseedoil 9 soybeanoil 8 cottonseedoil 7 cornoil 6 coconutoil 5 oliveoil 4 control 3 2 1 24.2 shortening What was thefunctionoftesttube1? What typeofbondpatternresultsinthegreatestdegree of What doesthedifferent degree offading oftheiodinecolor Which fats oroilsshowed agreaterfading oftheiodinecolor? Which fats oroilsshowed alesserfading oftheiodinecolor? Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter24 Degree of 191 192 8. 7. 6. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB Drawing aConclusion amount ofsaturatedfat? Drawing aConclusion Error Analysis bonds intheoilswhenhydrogenisadded. Explain whathappenstothecarbon-carbon gen tovegetable oilstomake themsolid. Hydrogenation istheprocessofaddinghydro- Chemistry: Matter andChange 24.2 What possiblesourcesoferrormayaccountforinaccurateresults? h eeosrain aeatr1 n iue,respectively? 2and3minutes, Why wereobservations madeafter1, Do animalfats orvegetable oilsgenerallycontainthegreater • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter24 2. place? molecules istheoxidationmostlikely totake unpleasant odorsandtastes. Where inthefat and producealdehydesacidsthathave Fats andoilsreactwithoxygenfromtheair aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Safety Precautions T Radioisotope Dating aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 4. 3. 2. 1. solar system? What istheageof Problem Name meteorite andthesolarsystem. potassium-argon radiochemicaldatingtoestimatetheageofZag the oldestartifactsinsolarsystem.Inthislab,youwilluse decayed. Forthisreason,theZagmeteoriteisbelievedtobeoneof the halitecrystalsformed.Thexenonformedwhenthisiodine from thesolarsystem.Scientistsbelievethatiodineexistedwhen product ofashort-livediodineisotopethathaslongbeenabsent meteorite hadaremarkablyhighabundanceof have existedintheearlysolarsystem.Thehalitecrystals that liquidwater, whichisessentialforthedevelopmentoflife,may the evaporationofbrine(saltwater).Itisonefewindications small crystalsofhalite(tablesalt),whichexpertsbelieveformedby Radioisotope Dating Pre-Lab reaction. emission. Write the equation forthisnuclear 1.25 time What isthenumberofdaughternucleipresentat ship iscalledthe 19 40 N Use theradioactive decayequationtoeliminate Simplify theexpression. nuclei attime What istheratioofdaughternucleitoparent tive nuclideis Suppose theinitialnumberofnucleiaradioac- can bewrittenas the amountofparentnucleiremainingatatime LAB 0 August 1998.Thismeteoritewasunusualinthatitcontained he ZagmeteoritefellinthewesternSaharaofMorocco K decaysto and t expressed intermsof , N 10 1 25.1 9 from youranswertoquestion 2. years anddecaysbypositron ( t 20 40 N expressed intermsof Ar. 0 andthatthehalf-lifeis , radioactive decayequation. N 1 19 40 LABORATORY MANUAL K hasahalf-lifeof N 0 (1/2) Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. N radiochemical dating. potassium-argon (K-Ar) Zag meteorite,using Determine Objectives 0 ( t / and T ) . This relation- . This N N 1 ? 0 the ageof and T . Then 1 0 N ) 1 ? t 128 Xe, adecay 2. 1. Procedure Draw asmoothcurve throughthepoints. number ofhalf-lives ontheaxes in Plot agraphofdaughter-to-parent ratioversus nuclei. Complete column istheratioofdaughternucleitoparent that have decayedto daughternuclei. The final to obtainthefractionoforiginalparentnuclei lives. Subtractthevalue incolumntwo from1.0 that remainaftertheindicatednumberofhalf- shows thefractionoforiginalparentnuclei half-life oftheradioactive parent.Columntwo expressed inunitsofthe one shows thetime, change withtimeinaradioactive system.Column Data Table1 aeClass Date graph paper calculator Materials (4 sheets) shows anumberofquantities that Data Table1. • Chapter25 Figure A. Section 25.3 Use with 193 194 Figure A Data andObservations 3. Name LAB passed sincethemeteoritewas formed.Multiply lives (tothenearesttenthofahalf-life)have graph in obtained areshown in samples fromtheZagmeteorite. The values The ratioof ubro aflvsPrn rcinDuhe rcinDaughter-to-parent ratio Daughterfraction Parent fraction Number ofhalf-lives Chemistry: Matter andChange 25.1 Figure A 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2 4 3 2 1 01 40

Daughter-to-parent ratio Ar to 10 15 to estimatehow many half- 0 5 40 0 K was measuredforfour Data Table2. Daughter-to-Parent Ratio Versus Elapsed Time • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter25 Parent anddaughternucleidata 1 Use your Elapsed time(half-lives) Data Table 1 2 age ofthemeteorite. determinations ofallfoursamplestoestimatethe of thesample.Useaverage value fromtheage the numberofhalf-lives by1.25 half-life of aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL 34 40 ,toobtainanestimateoftheage K, 10 9 er,the years,

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Average age(10 Name LAB accurate agefortheobject.Listandexplain afew possibleconcerns. researchers mustaddressinordertobeconfident thatthemeasurementstrulyyieldan each massareidentified andcounted. There areanumberofpracticalconcernsthat andthenumbersofions towards adetector. The lightestionsreachthedetectorfirst, vaporize andbecome ionized. A voltage isthenappliedthatacceleratesthecharged ions asmallsampleisheated withalaseruntilitsconstituentatoms trometer. Inthisprocess, Thinking Critically (in years)? Measuring andUsingNumbers 25.1 Sample 12.3 D 9.44 A 8.34 9.79 C B 9 yr) The K-Ardataforthisexperiment wereobtainedusingamassspec- 40 Ar/ Argon andpotassiumsampledata What istheaverage ageoftheZagmeteorite 40 ubro aflvsAge(10 Numberofhalf-lives K Data Table 2 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter25 9 yr) 195 196 4. 3. Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB dating usingcarbonisaninappropriatetechniqueformeteorites. Thinking Critically Comparing andContrasting half-lives of reaction isusedforradiochemicaldatingofacertainclassterrestrialobjects.How many the UnitedStates. The ratio of last advances ofthecontinental icesheetinto is believed todatefromthetimeofone Wisconsin, Creeks forestbednearMilwaukee, A sampleofsprucewood taken from Two in thesample? daughter-to-parent ratioforthedecayprocess atmospheric value ofthisratio. What isthe the samplewas foundtobe0.2446ofthe Chemistry: Matter andChange 25.1 40 C have passedsincetheZagmeteoriteformed? ae nyu nwrt usin3 explain whyradiochemical Based onyouranswertoquestion3, 14 14 C decaysto C to • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter25 12 C in 14 N withahalf-lifeof5730years. This 2. answer. sample? Show calculations thatsupportyour What istheestimatedageofsprucewood aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. T Modeling Isotopes aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions 100 pennies? position ofacollection What istheisotopiccom- Problem Name six protons.However, 14 isotopes ofanelement. experiment, thetwodifferent typesofpennieswillrepresenttwo copper. Thesepenniescontain2.5%copperand97.5%zinc.Inthis Beginning in1982,pennieshavebeenmadeofzincplatedwith price ofcopperledtoachangeinthecompositionpenny. an alloycomposedof95%copperand5%zinc.In1982,therising These isotopes,however, havedifferent masses. isotopes ofanelementareusuallychemicallyindistinguishable. determines chemicalpropertiesofanelement.Thus,thedifferent neutrons. Ingeneral,itisthenumberofprotonsandelectronsthat protons butdifferent numbersofneutrons.Forexample, have different Modeling Isotopes C aretwoisotopesofcarbon.Thenucleibothcontain fyuhv orqatr,fv ie,andnine five dimes, If you have fourquarters, weighted average tosolve thefollowing problem: divided bythetotalnumberofitems.Use andthesumis item. The productsareadded, item ismultipliedbythenumberofthattype thevalue ofeachtype In aweightedaverage, element iswhatknown asaweightedaverage. The average atomic massoftheatomsan What isanisotope? LAB Between 1962and1982,penniesweremadeofbrass,whichis the numberofprotonsinitsnucleus.Agivenelementmay he definingcharacteristicofanatomachemicalelementis 25.2 isotopes LABORATORY MANUAL 12 , whicharenucleiwiththesamenumbersof C hassixneutrons,whereas Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron inthelab. • • Objectives isotopic data. penny-isotope analogyto Apply 100 pennies. composition of Determine the lessonsof the isotopic 4. 3. 14 C haseight chart oftheprocedureyou willfollow. Read theentirelaboratory activity. Make aflow are analogoustoisotopesofanelement. Explain how thetwo different typesofpennies answer. Describe theprocedure. Then calculatethe whatistheaverage value ofthecoins? pennies, 12 aeClass Date balance pennies (100) Materials C and • Chapter25 Section 25.2 Use with 197 198 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Data andObservations 3. 2. 1. Procedure Name 1 post-1982 1 pre-1982 10 post-1982 10 pre-1982 LAB from Measuring andUsingNumbers Measuring andUsingNumbers instead ofthemassonepenny? Thinking Critically in to thenearest0.01g.Recordyourmeasurement Obtain 100pennies.Findthemassofsample 1982 penny. average massin age massofonepre-1982penny. Recordthis calculatetheaver- Using yourdatafromstep1, Table 1. nearest 0.01g.Recordyourmeasurementin Measure themassoftenpre-1982penniesto average value calculatedinquestion2? average massofapenny inthe100-penny sample.How doesyouranswercompareto the 100 tofind theaverage mass.Recordyouranswerin ene Mass(g) Pennies Data Table2. Chemistry: Matter andChange Data Table1 25.2 Mass ofpennies Data Table 1 Repeat forpost-1982pennies. Data Table1. and thenumberofeachtypepenny from nPoeuese ,whydidyoumeasurethemassoftenpennies In Procedurestep1, Repeat forapost- • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter25 Using themassofpre-1982andpost-1982pennies Divide themassof100penniesin Average massofapennyin100-pennysample(g) Number ofpost-1982penniesin100-pennysample Number ofpre-1982penniesin100-pennysample Mass of100pennies(g) Data Data Table2. coins. Follow yourteacher’s instructionsforreturningthe Cleanup andDisposal 4. each in and post-1982pennies.Recordthenumbersof Divide thesampleof100penniesintopre-1982 Data for100-pennysample aeClass Date Data Table2, Data Table 2 Data Table2. LABORATORY MANUAL Data Table2 calculate the by

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 6. 5. 4. Name LAB b. a. abundance forthemostcommonisotopesofcopperandzinc. Making andUsing Tables c. b. a. and apost-1982penny. Measuring andUsingNumbers to theatomicmassofatomsinasampleanelement? Comparing andContrasting a post-1982penny. The densityofcopperis8.96g/cm How many protonsandneutronsarethereinanucleusof How many protonsandneutronsarethereina mass ofapre-1982penny andthemassofapost-1982penny. calculatethetheoretical Using thedensityandvolume values fromquestions1and2, volume incm A typicalpenny hasadiameterof1.905cmandthickness0.124cm. What isthe (0.95)(8.96 g/cm thedensityofapre-1982penny is compositions given intheintroduction, 25.2 ic6 3 6 6.29 18.57 4.73 27.81 67.9249 48.89 66.9271 65.9260 63.9291 68 67 66 64 30 30 30 Zinc-68 30 Zinc-67 Zinc-66 Zinc-64 Copper-64 29 6464.9278 30.91 Copper-63 29 6362.9298 69.09 stp ubrnme as(m)abundance(%) mass (amu) number number Isotope 3 of atypicalpenny? Hint: 3 ) (0.05)(7.13 g/cm tmcMs stpc Relative Isotopic Mass Atomic Data Table3 How isthevalue youcalculatedinquestion 3analogous Calculate thetheoreticalmassofapre-1982penny 3 andthatofzincis7.13g/cm , 3 ) shows theisotopicmass andrelative V Data Table 3 8.87 g/cm ( 64 r Cu nucleus? 2 )(thickness ofpenny) 3 . Calculatethedensityof aeClass Date 64 Zn? LABORATORY MANUAL 3 . Usingthe • Chapter25 199 200 9. 8. 7. Name Real-World Chemistry uranium isrequiredtokeep thegeneratorrunningforaday? A nuclearpower plantthatgenerates1000MW ofpower uses3.2kg perdayof Naturally occurringuranium contains0.7% LAB Table 1 d. c. b. a. to calculatethefollowing. Applying Concepts b. a. Measuring andUsingNumbers Error Analysis How many totalatoms(copperandzinc)areinapost-1982penny? How many totalatoms(copperandzinc)areinapre-1982penny? How many atomsofzincareinapre-1982penny? Use Avogadro’s number.)How many atomsofcopperareinapre-1982penny? (Hint: Using thedatain Using thedatain Chemistry: Matter andChange 25.2 to theanswersofquestion2c. What mighthave causedany differences? Compare themassofapre-1982penny andapost-1982penny in Data Table3, Data Table3, Use thevalues from • calculate theatomicmassofzinc. calculate theatomicmassofcopper. Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter25 235 Data Table1 U and99.7% and theanswersfromquestion7 238 aeClass Date U. What massofnatural LABORATORY MANUAL 235 U. Data

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. O Organisms That Break DownOil aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual breaking downoil? Pseudomonas Penicillium How effective are Problem Name on asampleofoil. effectiveness ofthefungus of themicrobes.Inthisactivity, youwillobservethe bioremediation strips. Thedegreeofvisibilitytheshadedstripsindicatesdensity multiply, thesolutionbecomescloudy, obscuringsomeoftheshaded growth. Thesestripsareattachedtotheculturevessel.Asmicrobes number ofnaturalorganismsatthesite. not beengeneticallyengineered.Theprocesssimplyincreasesthe encouraging theirgrowth.Thesemicroorganismsarenatural.Theyhave process ofimprovingtheareaconcernbyaddingmicroorganismsand would takemanyyearstoaccomplishthecleanup.Biostimulationis two suchmicrobes.However, theyarepresentinsmallamounts,andit hydrocarbons. Thefungus contaminants arefound.Someofthesemicrobesbreakdown down contaminantsatthesite. bioremediation, whichisamethodofusingnaturalorganismstobreak chemical, andbiologicalmethods.Inthisactivity, you willfocuson tank leaks,andhouseholdgreasewastes. such ascontaminatedsoilfromautomotivefuelspills,industrial display ofconcern.However, oilpollutioncanalsobeseeninsituations million gallonsofoil. when anexploratorywelloff thecoastofMexicoreleasedabout140 during the1991GulfWar. Thesecondlargestspilltookplacein1979 Organisms That Break DownOil LAB Density indicatorstripsareusedtomonitortherateofmicrobial There arenaturallyoccurringmicrobeslivinginsoilandwaterwhere Cleanup ofmajoroilspillsmaybeaccomplishedbyphysical, Large oilspillsnearwellsandfromtankersposethemostvivid il spillscausesignificantenvironmentalproblems.Thelargestspillin history wasthedeliberatereleaseofoilintoPersianGulf and 26.1 for LABORATORY MANUAL Penicillium Penicillium • • Objectives degrade oil. Observe microbes onoil. hydrocarbon-degrading Observe and thebacteria microbes the effect of and thebacteria Pseudomonas Pseudomonas aeClass Date paper towels density indicator nutrient fertilizer lightweight oil sterilizing, disinfec- Pseudomonas sp. Penicillium sp. Materials strips (5) tant solution culture culture are sterile distilled labels (4) plastic dropping sterile 25-mLgradu- 250-mL beaker 30-mL sterile • Chapter26 water pipettes (4) ated cylinder caps (3) tubes withscrew culture test Section 26.2 Use with 201 202 Procedure Pre-Lab Safety Precautions Name 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. LAB appropriate testtube. Add about3mLof add about3mLof up othermicrobesbylaying down equipment, additional materials.Being carefulnottopick The controltesttubeshould notreceive any test tube. Add about0.1mLofnutrientfertilizertoeach Add 12dropsofoiltoeachtesttube. tube. of distilledwater intoeachsterileculturetest pour15mL Using a25-mLgraduatedcylinder, one testtube tubes. Labelthemallwithyourname. Affix labelstoeachofthesterileculturetest antibacterial soap. directed byyourteacher. Wash yourhandswith with papertowels and disposeofthetowels as and disinfectyourwork area. Wipe thearea manufacturer’s directionstothoroughlyclean Use thedisinfectantsolutionaccordingto your answerinthenext column. have ontheoilsuspendedinwater. Record hypothesis abouttheeffect themicrobeswill Read theentirelaboratoryactivity. Form a strips. Explain thefunctionofdensityindicator work area. Explain whyitisnecessarytodisinfectthe biostimulation. Briefly explain bioremediationand period onthe250-mLbeaker. andclass date, Place alabelwithyourname, Pseudomonas Chemistry: Matter andChange 26.1 Penicillium andthethirdtesttube , Penicillium thesecondtesttube , • • • • detergent afterremoving thegloves. sure towearglovesand washyourhandswithantibacterialsoapor Observe proper personal hygienewhenhandlingmicroorganisms. Be if theywere hazardous. Organisms orlivingmaterialsshouldalwaysbetreated andhandledas Dispose ofwastesasdirected byyourteacher. Always wearsafetygoggles,alabapron, andgloves. culture tothe • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter26 control . Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis 11. 10. 8. 7. 4. 3. 2. 1. 9. tube. liquid inthetesttube. set ofbarsshouldbejustbelow thelevel ofthe sity stripisvisiblethroughthesolution. The top to theoutsideofeachtesttubesothatden- being thelightestcoloration.Securestrips with1 Number thedensitystripsfrom1to5, the contents. each tubegentlytoensurethoroughmixingof Securely fasten thetoponeachtesttube.Shake soap beforeleaving the lab. Wash your handsthoroughlywithantibacterial work area. disinfectyour Using thedisinfectantsolution, Return alllabequipmentto itsproperplace. teacher. Dispose ofmaterialsasinstructedbyyour 5 days. your observations on Repeat thesameobservations dailyandrecord bacteria cultures. in theclassroom. beaker. Place thespecimensinawarm location way andplacethemallinthelabeled250-mL Loosen thecapsontesttubesabouthalf of thecontentstesttubeon andthegeneralappearance color oftheliquid, the Record thevisibilityofdensitystrips, Pseudomonas aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL culture tothe ATO:Donottouch CAUTION: Data Table1 Pseudomonas Data Table1. for atotalof test

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual Data andObservations Name a ettb otnsDniysrpraigClro iudoftest-tubecontents Colorofliquid Densitystripreading Test-tube contents Day LAB control 1 5 control 5 5 4 control 4 4 3 control 3 3 2 control 2 2 1 1 26.1 Pseudomonas Pseudomonas Pseudomonas Pseudomonas Pseudomonas Penicillium Penicillium Penicillium Penicillium Penicillium Data Table 1 aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL General appearance • Chapter26 203 204 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name Real-World Chemistry 1. LAB be thecauseofsomedifferences? the testtubesandthenleaving thecapspartiallyopened? Designing anExperiment/Identifying Variables control testtube? Designing anExperiment/Identifying Variables system andthegeneralappearanceindicate? Acquiring and Analyzing Information system indicate? Acquiring and Analyzing Information progressed? Observing andInferring Observing andInferring progressed? Observing andInferring Error Analysis that arenotnative toasitehave onthe ecology? What effect mighttheuseofmicroorganisms Chemistry: Matter andChange 26.1 Compare yourresultstothoseofotherstudentsinthe class. What could What happenedtothecloudinessoftubesas5days What changesoccurredineachtesttubeasthe5days Did oneorganism breakdown theoilbetterthan the otherorganism? • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter26 What doesanincreaseinthecloudinessof What didthechangesincolorof 2. What was thepurposeofshaking What was thefunctionof using bioremediationtechniques? Why mightknowledge ofpHbeusefulwhen aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. F Nitrogen Concentration Growth of Algae asaFunctionof aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 3. 2. 1. Pre-Lab Safety Precautions growth ofalgae? nitrates inwateraffect the How doesthepresenceof Problem Name investigate theeffect ofnitratesonalgae. water, killingfishandotheraquaticlife.Inthislab,youwill organisms die,thedecompositionprocessdepletesoxygenin and bacteriainthewatertoreproducerapidly. Whenthese common pollutants.Theycontributetopollutionbycausingalgae use inindustry. these watersourcespollutedandunfitforpersonalconsumptionor Nitrogen Concentration Growth of Algae asaFunctionof your hypothesisonpage206. tration ofnitrogenpollutants inwater. Record why thegrowth ofalgaemayindicatetheconcen- Read theentirelaboratory activity. Hypothesize Why islightneededforalgalgrowth? pollution inEarth’s freshwater? What aresourcesofnitrogenandphosphorus LAB Nitrogen andphosphoruscompoundsareamongthemost municipal reservoirs.However, dailyactivitiesoflifeoftenleave reshwater comesfrommanysources,includinglakes,rivers,and 26.2 LABORATORY MANUAL • • • • • Objectives indicator. using algalgrowthasan gen ispresentinwater, Identify growth. of nitrogenaffects algal Determine the lab. Wash yourhandswithsoapordetergentthoroughly before leaving Never eatortasteanysubstanceusedinthelab. Always wearsafetygogglesandalabapron. how muchnitro- how thelevel 2. 1. Procedure 0.6 NaNO ortahr totesttube1. your teacher, suppliedby Add 10mLofunknown solution, Label testtube1, follows andplacetheminthetest-tuberack. labelfive testtubesas Using achinamarker, M aeClass Date 15-mm distilled water unknown NaNO stock solutionsof algae culture Materials NaNO 3 test tubes(5) solution 0.3 0.9 0.6 ettb ,0.3 ; testtube3, M M M 3 NaNO NaNO NaNO n ettb ,0.9 ; andtesttube5, 150-mm Unknown 3 3 3 , and , 3 M NaNO ettb ,0.0 ; testtube2, 10-mL graduated china marker dropper test-tube rack aluminum foil light source • Chapter26 cylinder 3 M ; testtube4, NaNO Section 26.2 Use with 3 M . 205 206 Data andObservations 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. Name a ettb ettb ettb ettb Test tube 5 Test tube4 Test tube3 Test tube2 Test tube1 Day LAB the appearanceofeachtesttubein andrecord Check eachtesttubedailyfor10days, teacher directs. Place thetesttubesunderlightsourceasyour Table 1. Record theappearanceofeachtesttubein small pieceofaluminumfoil. and cover theopenendofalltesttubeswitha Place 10dropsofalgalcultureintoeachtesttube, Add 10mLoftheappropriateNaNO Add 10mLofdistilledwater totesttube2. ouint aho ettbs2 ,and4. 3, solution toeachoftesttubes2, 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Chemistry: Matter andChange 26.2 • Data Table1. Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter26 3 Observations foreachtesttube stock Data Data Table 1 4. 3. 2. 1. Cleanup andDisposal Hypothesis Clean upyourwork area. Return alllabequipmenttoitsproperplace. Dispose ofthealgaeasyourteacherdirects. waste container. Place allchemicalsintheappropriatelylabeled aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Analyze andConclude Name LAB amount ofpollutantswas allowed tokeep increasing? Predicting form ofNaNO Drawing aConclusion the nitrateconcentrationintesttubes2Ð5? Drawing aConclusion among testtubes2Ð5? Comparing andContrasting 10 days? Observing andInferring 26.2 What would youpredicttobetheimmediateresponseofalgalgrowth ifthe 3 thatwas presentinthe , htcnyucnld bu h muto olto,inthe What canyouconcludeabouttheamountofpollution, What canyouconcludeabouttheamountofalgalgrowth and What happenedineachtesttubeover thecourseof What was thedifference insodiumnitrateconcentration Unknown testtube1?Explain. , aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL • Chapter26 207 208 7. 6. Name Real-World Chemistry 2. 1. LAB investigation? Recognizing CauseandEffect Error Analysis why thismighthappen. algaeareseldomseen.Explain populations, In pondswherethereareviablefish andplant algae bloomsfromthewater supply? Why isitnotpossibletocompletelyeliminate Chemistry: Matter andChange 26.2 What couldbedonetoimprove theprecisionandaccuracy ofyour Why donitratesincreasegrowth ofalgae? • Catr2 LaboratoryManual Chapter26 3. purpose oftheseorganisms. snails andtadpolesintheponds.Explain People whohave backyard pondsoftenkeep aeClass Date LABORATORY MANUAL

Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Copyright © Glencoe/McGraw-Hill, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. aoaoyMna Chemistry:MatterandChange Laboratory Manual MacArt Design: Navta Associates: Art Credits CREDITS 2, 6,54,98,102,106,110,126 22, 26,33,34,37,38,58,62,94,150,162,166,194; Glencoe: x, xi,xii; 209